AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SECTION AT

Add to my manuals
350 Pages

advertisement

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SECTION AT | Manualzz

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

GI

MA

SECTION

AT

EM

LC

EC

FE

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX

....................................4

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................4

PRECAUTIONS

...............................................................6

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) ″ AIR BAG ″ and ″ SEAT BELT

PRE-TENSIONER ″

......................................................6

Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)

System of A/T and Engine...........................................6

Precautions..................................................................6

Service Notice or Precautions.....................................8

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................9

PREPARATION

.............................................................10

Special Service Tools ................................................10

OVERALL SYSTEM

......................................................12

A/T Electrical Parts Location .....................................12

Circuit Diagram..........................................................13

Cross-sectional View .................................................14

Hydraulic Control Circuit............................................15

Shift Mechanism ........................................................16

Control System ..........................................................25

Control Mechanism....................................................26

Control Valve .............................................................31

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM

DESCRIPTION

...............................................................33

Introduction ................................................................33

OBD-II Function for A/T System................................33

One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ..............33

OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)....................33

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................37

CONSULT ..................................................................37

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT.................46

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION

..................53

Introduction ................................................................53

Work Flow..................................................................57

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION

...........59

A/T Fluid Check .........................................................59

Stall Test ....................................................................59

Line Pressure Test.....................................................62

Road Test...................................................................63

C O N T E N T S

CL

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

...............................................................81

Symptom Chart..........................................................81

TCM Terminals and Reference Value........................92

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY

..........96

Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN......................................96

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

.....99

Description.................................................................99

Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW...............................101

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................102

Component Inspection.............................................104

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

CIRCUIT

.......................................................................105

Description...............................................................105

Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS......................................107

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................108

Component Inspection.............................................109

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T

(REVOLUTION SENSOR)

...........................................110

Description...............................................................110

Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T................................112

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................113

Component Inspection.............................................114

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

.......................115

Description...............................................................115

Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................117

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................118

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR

POSITION

....................................................................120

Description...............................................................120

Wiring Diagram - AT - 1ST ......................................123

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................124

Component Inspection.............................................125

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR

POSITION

....................................................................126

Description...............................................................126

Wiring Diagram - AT - 2ND......................................129

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................130

Component Inspection.............................................131

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR

POSITION

....................................................................132

Description...............................................................132

Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RD......................................135

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................136

Component Inspection.............................................137

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR

POSITION

....................................................................138

Description...............................................................138

Wiring Diagram - AT - 4TH......................................142

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................143

Component Inspection.............................................147

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH

SOLENOID VALVE

......................................................148

Description...............................................................148

Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................150

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................151

Component Inspection.............................................152

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

......153

Description...............................................................153

Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG ...............................156

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157

Component Inspection.............................................161

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

...162

Description...............................................................162

Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................164

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................165

Component Inspection.............................................167

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

..................169

Description...............................................................169

Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................171

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................172

Component Inspection.............................................173

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

..................174

Description...............................................................174

Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................176

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................177

Component Inspection.............................................178

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

...........179

Description...............................................................179

Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................182

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................183

Component Inspection.............................................187

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID

VALVE

..........................................................................188

Description...............................................................188

Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................190

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................191

Component Inspection.............................................192

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP

SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)

....193

Description...............................................................193

CONTENTS

(Cont’d)

Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................195

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................196

Component Inspection.............................................198

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.MTR

................................199

Description...............................................................199

Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................201

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................202

CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)

.....203

Description...............................................................203

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................204

CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)

......................................205

Description...............................................................205

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................206

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

...............207

Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC .............................207

1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On....210

2. Engine Cannot Be Started In ″ P ″ and ″ N ″

Position ....................................................................212

3. In ″ P ″ Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or

Backward When Pushed .........................................213

4. In ″ N ″ Position, Vehicle Moves ...........................214

5. Large Shock.

″ N ″ -> ″ R ″ Position .......................216

6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In ″ R ″

Position ....................................................................218

7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In ″ D ″ , ″ 2 ″

Or ″ 1 ″ Position.........................................................221

8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

-> D

2

...................224

Or Does Not 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

1

Kickdown: D

4

-> D

2

..................................................227

10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

2

11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

-> D

3

-> D

4

.............................230

.............................233

12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up .........................236

13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ..............238

14. Lock-up Is Not Released...................................240

15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light

Braking D

4

-> D

3

).....................................................241

16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D

-> D

3

1

.......................243

, When 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D

4

Overdrive Control Switch

ON

->

OFF

...............244

18. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

-> 2

-> 1

1

2

, When Selector

Lever ″ D ″ -> ″ 2 ″ Position.........................................245

19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2

2

, When Selector

Lever ″ 2 ″ -> ″ 1 ″ Position .........................................246

20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine

Brake........................................................................247

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,

Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches

Circuit Checks) ........................................................247

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

.........................................255

Description...............................................................255

Wiring Diagram - SHIFT -........................................256

Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................257

AT-2

Component Check...................................................259

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

..........................................260

Components.............................................................260

Removal...................................................................260

Installation................................................................261

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

..............................................262

Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators.............262

Revolution Sensor Replacement.............................263

Rear Oil Seal Replacement.....................................263

Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal

Replacement............................................................263

Parking Components Inspection..............................264

Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment ................265

Manual Control Linkage Adjustment........................265

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

...............................266

Removal...................................................................266

Installation................................................................267

OVERHAUL

.................................................................270

Components.............................................................270

Oil Channel..............................................................273

Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings.......................................................274

DISASSEMBLY

............................................................275

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

.........................286

Oil Pump..................................................................286

Control Valve Assembly...........................................290

Control Valve Upper Body .......................................296

Control Valve Lower Body .......................................301

Reverse Clutch ........................................................303

CONTENTS

(Cont’d)

GI

High Clutch ..............................................................307

Forward and Overrun Clutches ...............................309

Low & Reverse Brake..............................................313

Forward Clutch Drum Assembly..............................317

Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub..........319

Band Servo Piston Assembly ..................................322

Parking Pawl Components ......................................326

ASSEMBLY

..................................................................328

Assembly (1)............................................................328

Adjustment...............................................................336

Assembly (2)............................................................338

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

.......345

General Specifications.............................................345

Shift Schedule..........................................................345

Stall Revolution........................................................345

Line Pressure...........................................................345

Return Springs.........................................................346

Accumulator O-ring..................................................347

Clutches and Brakes ...............................................347

Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch........................349

Total End Play..........................................................349

Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ..............................350

Removal and Installation .........................................350

Shift Solenoid Valves...............................................350

Solenoid Valves .......................................................350

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor.................................350

Revolution Sensor ...................................................350

Dropping Resistor....................................................350

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-3

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

NAAT0179

ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC

NAAT0179S01

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

ENGINE SPEED SIG

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC

PNP SW/CIRC

SFT SOL A/CIRC*3

Items

(CONSULT screen terms)

ECM*1

1107

1208

1207

1205

1103

1104

1105

1106

1203

1101

1108

DTC

CONSULT

GST*2

P0731

P0732

P0733

P0734

P0744

P0710

P0725

P0745

P1760

P0705

P0750

Reference page

AT-120

AT-126

AT-132

AT-138

AT-153

AT-105

AT-115

AT-162

AT-188

AT-99

AT-169

SFT SOL B/CIRC*3

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4

1201

1204

1206

1102

P0755

P0740

P1705

P0720

AT-174

AT-148

AT-179

AT-110

*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.

*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.

*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time.

AT-4

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)

P NO. INDEX FOR DTC

=NAAT0179S02

DTC

CONSULT

GST*2

P0705

P0710

P0720

P0725

P0731

P0732

P0733

ECM*1

1101

1208

1102

1207

1103

1104

1105

Items

(CONSULT screen terms)

PNP SW/CIRC

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4

ENGINE SPEED SIG

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

Reference page

AT-99

AT-105

AT-110

AT-115

AT-120

AT-126

AT-132

P0734

P0740

P0744

P0745

1106

1204

1107

1205

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

AT-138

AT-148

AT-153

AT-162

P0750

P0755

P1705

P1760

1108

1201

1206

1203

SFT SOL A/CIRC*3

SFT SOL B/CIRC*3

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC

AT-169

AT-174

AT-179

AT-188

*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.

*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.

*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.

*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

HA

SC

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-5

PRECAUTIONS

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT

PRE-TENSIONER”

NAAT0001

The supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:

I For a frontal collision

The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.

I For a side collision

The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).

Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the

RS section

of this Service Manual.

WARNING:

I

To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.

I

Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air

Bag Module, see the RS section.

I

Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this

Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.

Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)

System of A/T and Engine

NAAT0002

The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.

CAUTION:

I

Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.

will cause the MIL to light up.

I

Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.)

I

Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.

I

Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.

I

Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and

ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

Precautions

NAAT0003

I

Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned off.

SEF289H

AT-6

PRECAUTIONS

Precautions (Cont’d)

I

When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break).

Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SEF291H

I

Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and make sure whether TCM functions prop-

erly or not. (See page AT-92.)

EC

FE

CL

MT

MEF040DA

I

After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform

“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE”.

The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-

TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.

TF

PD

AX

SAT964I

SU

I

Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.

I

Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.

I

Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission.

I

Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.

I

All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly.

I

Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.

I It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.

I

The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.

I

Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.

AT-7

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

Precautions (Cont’d)

PRECAUTIONS

I

Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.

I

Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.

I Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to “ATF COOLER SERVICE”

(Refer to AT-9).

I

After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.

I

When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system.

Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-24, “Changing A/T Fluid”.

Service Notice or Precautions

NAAT0004

FAIL-SAFE

NAAT0004S01

The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major electrical input/output device circuit is damaged.

Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.

When the ignition key is turned “ON” following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about

8 seconds. (For “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, refer to AT-46.)

Fail-Safe may occur without electrical circuit damage if the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions (such as excessive wheel spin followed by sudden braking). To recover normal shift pattern, turn the ignition key

“OFF” for 5 seconds, then “ON”.

The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions.

Always follow the “WORK FLOW” (Refer to AT-57).

The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:

The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor.

During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.

TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE

NAAT0004S04

The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:

I External leaks in the hub weld area.

I Converter hub is scored or damaged.

I Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.

I Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.

I Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter.

I Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.)

I Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze.

I Internal failure of stator roller clutch.

I Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).

I Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.

The torque converter should not be replaced if:

I The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.

AT-8

PRECAUTIONS

Service Notice or Precautions (Cont’d)

I The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.

I Transmission failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.

I Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such as taxi, delivery or police use.

ATF COOLER SERVICE

NAAT0004S02

Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer.

Replace radiator lower tank (which includes ATF cooler) with a new one and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air.

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS

NAAT0004S03

I A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on

AT-38 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.

I The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.

Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-35 to complete the repair and avoid

unnecessary blinking of the MIL.

I The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.

PNP switch

A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function

A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)

*: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-54, “Introduction”.

I

Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-5, “Description”.

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”.

I EL-9, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit.

When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:

I GI-34, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUP IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”.

I GI-23, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”.

NAAT0005

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

HA

SC

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-9

PREPARATION

Special Service Tools

Special Service Tools

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number

(Kent-Moore No.)

Tool name

ST2505S001

(J34301-C)

Oil pressure gauge set

1 ST25051001

( — )

Oil pressure gauge

(

2 ST25052000

Hose

3 ST25053000

( —

Joint pipe

)

)

(

4 ST25054000

Adapter

(

5 ST25055000

Adapter

— )

)

ST07870000

(J37068)

Transmission case stand

Description

NT097

Measuring line pressure

Disassembling and assembling A/T

a: 182 mm (7.17 in) b: 282 mm (11.10 in) c: 230 mm (9.06 in) d: 100 mm (3.94 in)

NT421

KV31102100

(J37065)

Torque converter oneway clutch check tool

Checking one-way clutch in torque converter

NAAT0006

NT098

ST25850000

(J25721-A)

Sliding hammer

Removing oil pump assembly

a: 179 mm (7.05 in) b: 70 mm (2.76 in) c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.

d: M12 x 1.75P

KV31102400

(J34285 and J34285-87)

Clutch spring compressor

NT422

Removing and installing clutch return springs

a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in)

NT423

AT-10

Tool number

(Kent-Moore No.)

Tool name

ST33200000

(J26082)

Drift

Description

(J34291)

Shim setting gauge set

NT091

NT101

PREPARATION

Special Service Tools (Cont’d)

GI

MA

Installing oil pump housing oil seal Installing rear oil seal

a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.

b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.

EM

LC

Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil pump thrust washer

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-11

A/T Electrical Parts Location

OVERALL SYSTEM

A/T Electrical Parts Location

NAAT0007

AT-12

SAT537J

OVERALL SYSTEM

Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram

NAAT0008

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT751A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-13

Cross-sectional View

OVERALL SYSTEM

Cross-sectional View

NAAT0010

AT-14

SAT125BA

OVERALL SYSTEM

Hydraulic Control Circuit

Hydraulic Control Circuit

NAAT0011

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

SAT624GA

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-15

OVERALL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism

Shift Mechanism

NAAT0012

The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight.

It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.

Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch and the other for the low clutch.

These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum.

CONSTRUCTION

NAAT0012S01

1. Torque converter clutch piston

2. Torque converter

3. Oil pump

4. Input shaft

5. Brake band

6. Reverse clutch

7. High clutch

8. Front pinion gear

9. Front sun gear

10. Front internal gear

11. Front planetary carrier

12. Rear sun gear

13. Rear pinion gear

14. Rear internal gear

15. Rear planetary carrier

16. Forward clutch

FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE

Clutch and brake components

Reverse clutch

6

High clutch

7

Forward clutch

16

R/C

H/C

F/C

Abbr.

Overrun clutch

18

Brake band

5

Forward one-way clutch

17

Low one-way clutch

19

Low & reverse brake

20

O/C

B/B

F/O.C

L/O.C

L & R/B

17. Forward one-way clutch

18. Overrun clutch

19. Low one-way clutch

20. Low & reverse brake

21. Parking pawl

22. Parking gear

23. Output shaft

SAT509I

NAAT0012S02

Function

To transmit input power to front sun gear

9

.

To transmit input power to front planetary carrier

11

.

To connect front planetary carrier

11

with forward one-way clutch

17

.

To connect front planetary carrier

11

with rear internal gear

14

.

To lock front sun gear

9

.

When forward clutch

16

is engaged, to stop rear internal gear

14

from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.

To stop front planetary carrier

11

from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.

To lock front planetary carrier

11

.

AT-16

OVERALL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART

NAAT0012S03

Shift position

Reverse clutch

High clutch

Forward clutch

Overrun clutch

2nd apply

Band servo

3rd release

4th apply

Forward one

-way clutch

Low oneway clutch

Low & reverse brake

Lock-up Remarks

P

R

N q q

PARK

POSITION

REVERSE

POSITION

NEUTRAL

POSITION

D*4

1st

2nd

3rd

4th

1st q q q q q

C

*1D

*1A

*1A q

*2C

*3C

C

C q

B

B

B

B

*5q q

Automatic shift

1 k 2 k 3 k

4

2

1

2nd

1st

2nd q q q q q q q q q q

B

B

B

B

B

B q

Automatic shift

1 k 2

Locks (held stationary) in

1st speed

1 g 2

*1: Operates when overdrive control switch is being set in “OFF” position.

*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.

*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.

*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.

*5: Operates when overdrive control switch is “OFF”.

q : Operates.

A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.

B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.

C: Operates but does not affect power transmission.

D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

HA

SC

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-17

OVERALL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

POWER TRANSMISSION

=NAAT0012S04

“N” and “P” Positions

NAAT0012S0401

I “N” position

No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft since the clutch does not operate.

I “P” position

Similar to the “N” position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.

SAT039J

AT-18

“1

1

” Position

Forward clutch

Forward one-way clutch

Overrun clutch

Low and reverse brake

Engine brake

OVERALL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

=NAAT0012S0406

As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse brake.

This is different from that of D

1 and 2

1

.

GI

MA

Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SAT100J

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-19

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

“D

1

” and “2

1

” Positions

Forward one-way clutch

Forward clutch

Low one-way clutch

Overrun clutch

engagement conditions

(Engine brake)

OVERALL SYSTEM

=NAAT0012S0402

Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these three clutches. (Start-up at D

1

)

D

2

1

1

: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”

Throttle opening less than 3/16

: Throttle opening less than 3/16

At D

1 clutch.

and 2

1 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way

AT-20

SAT096J

OVERALL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

“D

2

”, “2

2

” and “1

2

” Positions

Forward clutch

Forward one-way clutch

Brake band

=NAAT0012S0403

Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.

As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed.

Overrun clutch

engagement conditions

D

2

2

2

1

2

: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”

Throttle opening less than 3/16

: Throttle opening less than 3/16

: Always engaged

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

SAT097J

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-21

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

“D

3

” Position

High clutch

Forward clutch

Forward one-way clutch

Overrun clutch

engagement conditions

OVERALL SYSTEM

=NAAT0012S0404

Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch.

This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed.

D

3

: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”

Throttle opening less than 3/16

AT-22

SAT098J

“D

4

” (OD) Position

High clutch

Brake band

Forward clutch

(Does not affect power transmission)

Engine brake

OVERALL SYSTEM

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

=NAAT0012S0405

Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.

This front planetary carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes front internal gear (output) turn faster.

At D

4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SAT099J

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-23

Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)

“R” Position

Reverse clutch

Low and reverse brake

Engine brake

OVERALL SYSTEM

=NAAT0012S0407

Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake.

Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction.

As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.

AT-24

SAT101J

OVERALL SYSTEM

Control System

Control System

=NAAT0013

OUTLINE

NAAT0013S01

The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.

TCM ACTUATORS SENSORS

PNP switch

Throttle position sensor

Closed throttle position switch

Wide open throttle position switch

Engine speed signal

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Revolution sensor

Vehicle speed sensor

Overdrive control switch

ASCD control unit

E

Shift control

Line pressure control

Lock-up control

Overrun clutch control

Timing control

Fail-safe control

Self-diagnosis

CONSULT communication line

Duet-EU control

E

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve

O/D OFF indicator lamp

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CONTROL SYSTEM

NAAT0013S02

CL

MT

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT068JA

BT

TF

PD

AX

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-25

OVERALL SYSTEM

Control System (Cont’d)

TCM FUNCTION

The function of the TCM is to:

I Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.

I Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.

I Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM

Sensors and solenoid valves

PNP switch

Throttle position sensor

Closed throttle position switch

Wide open throttle position switch

=NAAT0013S03

NAAT0013S04

Function

Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM.

Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM.

Detects throttle valve’s fully-closed position and sends a signal to TCM.

Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and sends a signal to TCM.

Input

Engine speed signal

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Revolution sensor

Output

Vehicle speed sensor

Overdrive control switch

ASCD control unit

Shift solenoid valve A/B

Line pressure solenoid valve

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

O/D OFF indicator lamp

From ECM.

Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.

Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.

Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions.

Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to “D

4

TCM.

” (overdrive) position, to the

Sends the cruise signal and “D

4 control unit to TCM.

” (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD

Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.

Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.

Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.

Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.

Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction.

Control Mechanism

NAAT0180

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL

NAAT0180S01

TCM has the various line pressure control characteristics to meet the driving conditions.

An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics.

Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.

AT-26

OVERALL SYSTEM

Control Mechanism (Cont’d)

Normal Control

NAAT0180S0101

The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable clutch operation.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT003J

Back-up Control (Engine brake)

If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D or D

3

NAAT0180S0102

4

(OD)

, great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to deal with this driving force.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT004J

During Shift Change

NAAT0180S0103

The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock.

TF

PD

AX

SAT005J

SU

At Low Fluid Temperature

NAAT0180S0104

I

Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize shifting quality.

BR

ST

RS

BT

I

The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission fluid when temperature is low.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT006J

AT-27

Control Mechanism (Cont’d)

OVERALL SYSTEM

I Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to 10°C (14°F).

This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low temperature.

SAT007J

SHIFT CONTROL

NAAT0180S02

The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and throttle position sensor. This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy.

Shift solenoid valve

A

B

Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B

NAAT0180S0201

The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the throttle position sensor and revolution sensor to select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM.

The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When set to “ON”, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the shift valve.

[Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions]

SAT008J

D

1

, 2

1

, 1

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

D

2

, 2

2

, 1

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

Gear position

D

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

D

4

(OD)

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Control of Shift Valves A and B

N-P

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

NAAT0180S0202

SAT047J

AT-28

OVERALL SYSTEM

Control Mechanism (Cont’d)

Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves

A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B.

The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.

LOCK-UP CONTROL

NAAT0180S03

The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to oil pressure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.

Conditions for Lock-up Operation

NAAT0180S0301

When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.

Overdrive control switch

Selector lever

Gear position

Vehicle speed sensor

Throttle position sensor

Closed throttle position switch

A/T fluid temperature sensor

ON OFF

“D” position

D

4

More than set value

D

3

Less than set opening

OFF

More than 40°C (104°F)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control

NAAT0180S0302

The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the

TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the “OFF” period, and opens the circuit during the “ON” period. If the percentage of

OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and pilot pressure remains high.

The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock.

BR

ST

RS

BT

SAT010J

OFF-time INCREASING

"

Amount of drain DECREASING

"

Pilot pressure HIGH

"

Lock-up RELEASING

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT011J

AT-29

Control Mechanism (Cont’d)

OVERALL SYSTEM

Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation

NAAT0180S0303

“D” position

“2” position

“1” position

SAT048J

Lock-up Released

The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked.

Lock-up Applied

When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch piston applied.

Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up.

OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE

CONTROL)

NAAT0180S04

Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective.

The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.

Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions

NAAT0180S0401

Gear position

D

1

, D

2

, D

3 gear position

2

1

, 2

2 gear position

1

1

, 1

2 gear position

Throttle opening

Less than 3/16

At any position

SAT014J

AT-30

OVERALL SYSTEM

Control Mechanism (Cont’d)

Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control

NAAT0180S0402

The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control

(engine brake control).

When this solenoid valve is “ON”, the pilot pressure drain port closes. When it is “OFF”, the drain port opens.

During the solenoid valve “ON” pilot pressure is applied to the end face of the overrun clutch control valve.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT015J

Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation

NAAT0180S0403

When the solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure A is applied to the overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does not engage.

When the solenoid valve is “OFF”, pilot pressure A is not generated. At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun clutch to engage.

In the “1” position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT049J

Control Valve

Valve name

I Pressure regulator valve

I Pressure regulator plug

I Pressure regulator sleeve plug

Pressure modifier valve

NAAT0181

FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE

NAAT0181S01

Function

Regulate oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving conditions.

Modifier accumulator piston

Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving conditions.

Smooths hydraulic pressure regulated by the pressure modifier valve to prevent pulsations.

Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, 3-2 timing required for shifting.

Regulate accumulator backpressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.

Accumulator control valve

Accumulator control sleeve

Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.

Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-31

TF

PD

AX

OVERALL SYSTEM

Control Valve (Cont’d)

Shift valve A

Shift valve B

Valve name

Shuttle shift valve S

Overrun clutch control valve

4-2 relay valve

4-2 sequence valve

Servo charger valve

3-2 timing valve

“1” reducing valve

Overrun clutch reducing valve

Torque converter relief valve

Torque converter clutch control valve, torque converter clutch control plug and torque converter clutch control sleeve

Shuttle shift valve D

Function

Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve

A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).

Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th

,

3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.

Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve

B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).

Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th

,

3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A.

Switches hydraulic circuits to provide 3-2 timing control and overrun clutch control in relation to the throttle opening.

Inactivates the overrun clutch to prevent interlocking in 4th gear when the throttle is wide open.

Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with application of the brake band in 4th gear. (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during D

4 gear operation.)

Memorizes that the transmission is in 4th gear. Prevents the transmission from downshifting from 4th gear to 3rd and then to 2nd in combination with 4-2 sequence valve and shift valves A and B when downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear.

Prevents band servo pressure from draining before high clutch operating pressure and band servo releasing pressure drain (from the same circuit) during downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear.

An accumulator and a one-way orifice are used in the 2nd gear band servo oil circuit to dampen shifting shock when shifting from 1st to 2nd gear.

To maintain adequate flowrate when downshifting from 4th or 3rd gear to 2nd gear, the servo charger valve directs 2nd gear band servo hydraulic pressure to the circuit without going through the one-way orifice when downshifting from 3rd or a higher gear.

Prevents a late operation of the brake band when shifting selector lever from “D” to

“1” or “2” position while driving in D

3

.

Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when downshifting from the “1” position 2nd gear to 1st gear.

Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.

In “1” and “2” positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability.

Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.

Activate or inactivate the lock-up function.

Also provide smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system.

Switches hydraulic circuits so that output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve acts on the lock-up valve in the “D” position of 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. (In the “D” position 1st gear, lock-up is inhibited.)

I Lock-up control is not affected in “D” position 2nd, 3rd or 4th gears, unless output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is generated by a signal from the control unit.

AT-32

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Introduction

Introduction

NAAT0014

The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.

The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.

The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,

refer to AT-50.

OBD-II Function for A/T System

NAAT0182

The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the

ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.

The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts.

One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II

NAAT0015

ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

NAAT0015S01

If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.

TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC

NAAT0015S02

When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC

(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip

If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip

A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below.

MIL

Items

Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 (1108)

Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 (1201)

Throttle position sensor or switch — DTC: P1705 (1206)

Except above

One trip detection

X

X

X

Two trip detection

X

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation.

OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

NAAT0016

HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

NAAT0016S01

DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.

1.

( No Tools)

The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II

(Self-Diagnostic Results) Examples: 1101, 1102, 1103, 1104, etc. For details, refer to EC-70, “DESCRIP-

TION”.

These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.

2.

( with CONSULT or GST)

CONSULT or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720,

P0725, etc.

These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.

(CONSULT also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)

I

1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.

I

Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction.

However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal.

CONSULT can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT (if available) is recommended.

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-33

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)

A sample of CONSULT display for DTC is shown at left. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.

SEF895K

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.

SAT365J

If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.

SAT364J

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data

NAAT0016S0101

The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.

Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or

GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-80, “CONSULT”.

Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the

ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.

AT-34

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)

Priority

1

2

3

Freeze frame data

Items

Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 (0701, 0603 - 0608)

Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0115), P0172 (0114), P0174 (0209), P0175

(0210)

Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)

1st trip freeze frame data

Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.

HOW TO ERASE DTC

NAAT0016S02

The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as described following.

I

If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.

I

When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM.

The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-55, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.

I

Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)

I

1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)

I

Freeze frame data

I

1st trip freeze frame data

I

System readiness test (SRT) codes

I

Test values

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT)

I

If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM.

NAAT0016S03

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least

5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.

2. Turn CONSULT “ON” and touch “A/T”.

3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.

5. Touch “ENGINE”.

6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-35

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)

SAT382J

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)

NAAT0016S04

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least

5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.

2. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-46. (The engine warm-up

step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)

3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-93, “DESCRIPTION”.

HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)

NAAT0016S05

1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least

5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.

2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-46. (The engine warm-up step

can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)

3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by turning the mode selector on the ECM.

Refer to EC-72, “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES”.

AT-36

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

SAT964I

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

=NAAT0183

1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking the blown lamp.

I

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to

EL-101, “Schematic”.

(Or see MIL & Data Link Connectors in EC-587.)

2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp should go off.

If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For detail, refer to EC-54, “Introduction”.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

CONSULT

NAAT0184

After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CON-

SULT)” (AT-38), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOS-

TIC WORKSHEET”, AT-55. Reference pages are provided follow-

ing the items.

NOTICE:

1) The CONSULT electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).

Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the

CONSULT display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning.

Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.

2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on

CONSULT and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:

I

Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,

I

Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and

I Gear position displayed on CONSULT indicates the point where shifts are completed.

3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).

4) Additional CONSULT information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT unit.

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-37

CONSULT (Cont’d)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT)

NAAT0184S01

1. Turn on CONSULT and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.

If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground

circuit. Refer to AT-92. If result is NG, refer to EL-9, “Sche-

matic”.

SAT038J

2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.

Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation.

CONSULT performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS.

Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.

SAT416J

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE

TCM self-diagnosis

NAAT0184S02

OBD-II (DTC)

Detected items

(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG

RESULTS” test mode)

Malfunction is detected when ...

“A/T” “ENGINE”

PNP switch circuit

Revolution sensor

VHCL SPEED

SEN·A/T

VEH SPD SEN/CIR

AT

Vehicle speed sensor (Meter)

VHCL SPEED

SEN·MTR

A/T 1st gear function

A/T 2nd gear function

A/T 3rd gear function

A/T 4th gear function

PNP SW/CIRC

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN

I TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on the gear position) from the switch.

I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.

I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.

I A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

I A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

I A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

I A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

AT-38

Available by

O/D OFF indicator lamp or

“A/T” on CONSULT

X

X

Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,

“ENGINE” on CON-

SULT or GST

P0705

P0720

P0731*1

P0732*1

P0733*1

P0734*1

Detected items

(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG

RESULTS” test mode)

“A/T”

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

“ENGINE”

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM self-diagnosis

Available by

O/D OFF indicator lamp or

“A/T” on CONSULT

CONSULT (Cont’d)

OBD-II (DTC)

GI

MA

Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,

“ENGINE” on CON-

SULT or GST

P0744*1

EM

LC

EC

A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)

— A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

I A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.

Shift solenoid valve A

SHIFT SOLENOID/V

A

SFT SOL A/CIRC

I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

Shift solenoid valve B

SHIFT SOLENOID/V

B

SFT SOL B/CIRC

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

OVERRUN CLUTCH

S/V

O/R CLUCH SOL/

CIRC

T/C clutch solenoid valve

T/C CLUTCH SOL/V TCC SOLENOID/

CIRC

Line pressure solenoid valve

LINE PRESSURE

S/V

Throttle position sensor

Throttle position switch

THROTTLE POSI

SEN

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

TP SEN/CIRC A/T

Engine speed signal

I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.

ENGINE SPEED SIG

I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the

ECM.

I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.

A/T fluid temperature sensor

BATT/FLUID TEMP

SEN

TCM (RAM)

ATF TEMP SEN/

CIRC

CONTROL UNIT

(RAM)

TCM (ROM)

CONTROL UNIT

(ROM)

TCM (EEPROM)

CONTROL UNIT

(EEPROM)

I TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning.

I TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning.

I TCM memory (EEPROM) is malfunctioning.

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

P0750

P0755

P1760

P0740

P0745

P1705

P0725

P0710

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-39

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

CONSULT (Cont’d)

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)

Detected items

(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG

RESULTS” test mode)

“A/T” “ENGINE”

Malfunction is detected when ...

Available by

O/D OFF indicator lamp or

“A/T” on CONSULT

Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,

“ENGINE” on CON-

SULT or GST

Initial start

INITIAL START

No failure

(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDI-

CATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE

REQUIRED**)

X: Applicable

—: Not applicable

*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL

*2: Refer to EC-70, “DESCRIPTION”.

I This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen.)

I No failure has been detected.

X

X if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.

DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T)

Item Display

Monitor item

ECU input signals

Main signals

Description

Vehicle speed sensor 1

(A/T)

(Revolution sensor)

Vehicle speed sensor 2

(Meter)

Throttle position sensor

A/T fluid temperature sensor

THRTL POS

SEN

[V]

FLUID TEMP SE

[V]

Battery voltage

Engine speed

Overdrive control switch

VHCL/S SE·A/T

[km/h] or [mph]

VHCL/S SE·MTR

[km/h] or [mph]

BATTERY VOLT

[V]

ENGINE SPEED

[rpm]

OVERDRIVE SW

[ON/OFF]

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Remarks

NAAT0184S03

I Vehicle speed computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed.

I Vehicle speed computed from signal of vehicle speed sensor is displayed.

When racing engine in “N” or “P” position with vehicle stationary, CONSULT data may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph).

Vehicle speed display may not be accurate under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when vehicle is stationary.

I Throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed.

I A/T fluid temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed.

I Signal voltage lowers as fluid temperature rises.

I Source voltage of TCM is displayed.

I Engine speed, computed from engine speed signal, is displayed.

Engine speed display may not be accurate under approx. 800 rpm. It may not indicate 0 rpm even when engine is not running.

I ON/OFF state computed from signal of overdrive control SW is displayed.

AT-40

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

CONSULT (Cont’d) switch

Item

P/N position switch

R position switch

D position switch

2 position switch

1 position switch

ASCD cruise signal

ASCD OD cut signal

Kickdown switch

Closed throttle position

Wide open throttle position switch

W/O THRL/P-SW

[ON/OFF]

Gear position

Selector lever position

Vehicle speed

Display

P/N POSI SW

[ON/OFF]

R POSITION SW

[ON/OFF]

D POSITION SW

[ON/OFF]

2 POSITION SW

[ON/OFF]

1 POSITION SW

[ON/OFF]

ASCD·CRUISE

[ON/OFF]

ASCD OD CUT

[ON/OFF]

KICKDOWN SW

[ON/OFF]

CLOSED

THL/SW

[ON/OFF]

GEAR

SLCT LVR POSI

VEHICLE

SPEED

[km/h] or [mph]

Monitor item

ECU input signals

Main signals

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Description Remarks

I ON/OFF state computed from signal of P/N position SW is displayed.

I ON/OFF state computed from signal of R position

SW is displayed.

I ON/OFF state computed from signal of D position

SW is displayed.

I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2 position SW, is displayed.

I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1 position SW, is displayed.

I Status of ASCD cruise signal is displayed.

ON ... Cruising state

OFF ... Normal running state

I Status of ASCD OD release signal is displayed.

ON ... OD released

OFF ... OD not released

I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of kickdown SW, is displayed.

I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of closed throttle position

SW, is displayed.

I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of wide open throttle position SW, is displayed.

I Gear position data used for computation by TCM, is displayed.

I Selector lever position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed.

I Vehicle speed data, used for computation by

TCM, is displayed.

I This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted.

I This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted.

I This is displayed even when no kickdown switch is equipped.

I A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-41

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

CONSULT (Cont’d) valve

Item

Throttle position

Line pressure duty

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

Overrun clutch solenoid

Display

THROTTLE

POSI

[/8]

LINE PRES DTY

[%]

TCC S/V DUTY

[%]

SHIFT S/V A

[ON/OFF]

SHIFT S/V B

[ON/OFF]

OVERRUN/C

S/V

[ON/OFF]

Self-diagnosis display lamp

(O/D OFF indicator lamp)

X: Applicable

—: Not applicable

SELF-D DP LMP

[ON/OFF]

Monitor item

ECU input signals

Main signals

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

Description Remarks

I Throttle position data, used for computation by

TCM, is displayed.

I A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error.

I Control value of line pressure solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed.

I Control value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve, computed by

TCM from each input signal, is displayed.

I Control value of shift solenoid valve A, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed.

I Control value of shift solenoid valve B, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed.

I Control value of overrun clutch solenoid valve computed by TCM from each input signal is displayed.

I Control status of O/D

OFF indicator lamp is displayed.

Control value of solenoid is displayed even if solenoid circuit is disconnected.

The “OFF” signal is displayed if solenoid circuit is shorted.

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT

NAAT0184S04

CONSULT Setting Procedure

NAAT0184S0401

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Connect CONSULT to Data link connector for CONSULT. Data link connector for CONSULT is located in instrument lower panel on driver side.

SAT326I

AT-42

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

CONSULT (Cont’d)

GI

MA

SEF392I

5. Touch “A/T”.

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

SAT974H

6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.

SAT384J

7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).

SAT975I

8. Touch “START”.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

SAT976I

AT-43

CONSULT (Cont’d)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-

CEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

SAT977I

I

When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.

SAT978I

10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.

SAT979I

SAT980I

11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed.

SAT981I

AT-44

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.

CONSULT (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT982I

13. CONSULT procedure ended.

If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to

“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT983I

DTC work support item

1ST GR FNCTN P0731

2ND GR FNCTN P0732

3RD GR FNCTN P0733

SAT980I

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE

Description

Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed.

I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)

I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed.

I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)

I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed.

I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)

I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Check item

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

NAAT0184S05

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-45

TF

PD

AX

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

CONSULT (Cont’d)

DTC work support item

4TH GR FNCTN P0734

TCC S/V FNCTN P0744

Description

Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed.

I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)

I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Check item

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Overrun clutch solenoid valve

I Line pressure solenoid valve

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can be confirmed.

I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)

I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT

NAAT0206

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)

NAAT0206S01

Refer to EC-93, “DESCRIPTION”.

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO

TOOLS)

Refer to EC-70, “DESCRIPTION”.

NAAT0206S02

SAT491J

TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)

NAAT0206S03

Preparation

NAAT0206S0301

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Connect the handy type vacuum pump to the throttle opener and apply vacuum 25.3 kPa ( 190 mmHg, 7.48 inHg).

3. Disconnect the throttle position switch harness connector.

4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

5. Check continuity of the closed throttle position switch.

Continuity should exist.

(If continuity does not exist, check throttle opener and closed throttle position switch. Then increase vacuum until closed throttle position switch shows continuity.)

6. Go to “DIAGOSIS START” on next page.

SAT694I

AT-46

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP

1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.

2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

3. Wait 5 seconds.

GI

MA

EM

LC

4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?

EC

SAT967I

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 2.

©

Go to “1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-210.

TF

SAT325IA

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-47

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

2 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position.

3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.

4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)

5. Depress and hold overdrive control switch in “OFF” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”) until directed to

release the switch. (If O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on, go to step 3 on AT-250).

6. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

SAT968I

7. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position (Do not start engine.).

8. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”).

9. Wait 2 seconds.

10. Move selector lever to “2” position.

11. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”).

12. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”) until directed to release the switch.

SAT969I

© GO TO 3.

AT-48

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

3 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2

1. Move selector lever to “1” position.

2. Release the overdrive control switch.

3. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”).

4. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”).

5. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”) until directed to release the switch.

GI

MA

EM

LC

6. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.

7. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will begin to flash “ON” and “OFF”).

EC

FE

SAT970I

CL

MT

©

GO TO 4.

4 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

Check O/D OFF indicator lamp.

Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-50.

©

DIAGNOSIS END

TF

PD

SAT981F

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SAT325IA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-49

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE

All judgement flickers are same.

O/D OFF indicator lamp:

1st judgement flicker is longer than others.

NAAT0206S04

SAT436F

All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK.

SAT437F

Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION

SENSOR), AT-110.

2nd judgement flicker is longer than others.

3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT439F

Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR, AT-199.

SAT441F

Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR, AT-179.

4th judgement flicker is longer than others.

5th judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT443F

Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A, AT-169.

SAT445F

Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B, AT-174.

AT-50

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

6th judgement flicker is longer than others.

O/D OFF indicator lamp:

7th judgement flicker is longer than others.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT447F

Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE, AT-188.

SAT449F

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID

VALVE, AT-148.

8th judgement flicker is longer than others.

9th judgement flicker is longer than others.

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

SAT451F

A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power source circuit is damaged.

Go to A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM

POWER SOURCE, AT-193.

SAT453F

Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL, AT-115.

10th judgement flicker is longer than others.

Flickers as shown below.

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

SAT455F

Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.

Go to LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE, AT-162.

SAT457F

Battery power is low.

Battery has been disconnected for a long time.

Battery is connected conversely.

(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-51

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

O/D OFF indicator lamp:

Lamp comes on.

SAT367J

PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.

Go to 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,

OVERDRIVE CONTROL AND THROTTLE POSITION

SWITCHES), AT-247.

t

1

= 2.5 seconds t

2

= 2.0 seconds t

3

= 1.0 second t

4

= 1.0 second

AT-52

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION

SAT631IB

SAT632I

Introduction

Introduction

NAAT0019

The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.

The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the

A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory.

Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc.

It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.

A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test with CONSULT (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should

be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-57.

Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the

example (AT-55) should be used.

Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.

This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.

Also check related Service bulletins.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SEF234G

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-53

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION

Introduction (Cont’d)

Customer name MR/MS

Trans. model

Incident Date

Frequency

Symptoms

DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET

Information From Customer

KEY POINTS

WHAT

..... Vehicle & A/T model

WHEN

..... Date, Frequencies

WHERE

..... Road conditions

HOW

..... Operating conditions, Symptoms

VIN Model & Year

Engine

Manuf. Date

Mileage

In Service Date l Continuous l Intermittent ( times a day) l Vehicle does not move. (l Any position l Particular position) l No up-shift (l 1st , 2nd l 2nd , 3rd l 3rd , O/D) l No down-shift (l O/D , 3rd l 3rd , 2nd l 2nd , 1st) l Lockup malfunction l Shift point too high or too low.

l Shift shock or slip (l N , D l Lockup l Any drive position) l Noise or vibration l No kickdown l No pattern select

( l Others

Blinks for about 8 seconds.

O/D OFF indicator lamp l Continuously lit

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) l Continuously lit l Not lit l Not lit

)

=NAAT0019S01

NAAT0019S0101

AT-54

1.

2.

3.

4.

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION

Introduction (Cont’d)

Diagnostic Worksheet

AT-8

AT-59

=NAAT0019S0102 l Read the Fail-safe Remarks and listen to customer complaints.

l CHECK A/T FLUID l Leakage (Follow specified procedure) l Fluid condition l Fluid level

Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST.

l Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.

l Torque converter one-way clutch l Reverse clutch l Forward clutch l Overrun clutch l Forward one-way clutch l Low & reverse brake l Low one-way clutch l Engine l Line pressure is low l Clutches and brakes except high clutch and brake band are OK l Pressure test — Suspected parts: l Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures.

4-1. Check before engine is started.

AT-59, AT-62

AT-63

AT-64

l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items.

l PNP switch, AT-99.

l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-105.

l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-110.

l Engine speed signal, AT-115.

l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148.

l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-162.

l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-169.

l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-174.

l Throttle position sensor, AT-179.

l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-188.

l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-193.

l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199.

l Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-203.

l Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-205.

l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-247.

l Battery l Others

4-2. Check at idle

l 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-210.

l 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-212.

l 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-213.

l 4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-214.

l 5. Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position, AT-216.

l 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-218.

l 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-221.

AT-66

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-55

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION

5.

6.

7.

Introduction (Cont’d)

4.

8.

9.

4-3. Cruise test

Part-1 l 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

1 l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

,

2

,

D

D

2

,

D

4

1

, AT-224.

Or Does Not Kickdown: D

3

, AT-230.

, AT-233.

4

,

D

2

, AT-227.

l 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

l 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-236.

l 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-238.

l 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-240.

l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D

4

,

D

3

), AT-241.

Part-2 l 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

1

1

, AT-243.

Or Does Not Kickdown: D

4

,

D

2 l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D l 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

,

2

3

D

,

D

2

,

D

4

3

, AT-230.

, AT-233.

, AT-227.

Part-3 l 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D

4

,

D

3

When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, AT-244

l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D

3

), AT-241.

l 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 2 l 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2

2

3

,

2

,

1

1

2

, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position, AT-245.

l 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-247.

l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.

2

), AT-241.

, When Selector Lever “2” , “1” Position, AT-246.

l PNP switch, AT-99.

l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-105.

l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-110.

l Engine speed signal, AT-115.

l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148.

l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-162.

l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-169.

l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-174.

l Throttle position sensor, AT-179.

l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-188.

l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-193.

l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199.

l Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-203.

l Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-205.

l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-247.

l Battery l Others l For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts.

l Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures.

l Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items.

Refer to EC-55, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.

l DTC (P0731, 1103) A/T 1st gear function, AT-120.

l DTC (P0732, 1104) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-126.

l DTC (P0733, 1105) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-132.

l DTC (P0734, 1106) A/T 4th gear function, AT-138.

l DTC (P0744, 1107) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-153.

l Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts.

Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible symptoms and the component inspection orders.) l Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories.

AT-67

AT-71

AT-75

AT-77

AT-38

AT-63

EC-55

AT-92

AT-81

AT-35

AT-56

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION

Work Flow

Work Flow

NAAT0020

HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR

NAAT0020S01

A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.

In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.

Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-54) and “DIAGNOS-

TIC WORKSHEET” (AT-55), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-57

Work Flow (Cont’d)

WORK FLOW CHART

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION

NAAT0020S02

*1: AT-54

*2: AT-55

*3: AT-8

*4: AT-59

*5: AT-59, 62

*6: AT-63

*7: AT-37

*8: AT-33

*9: AT-50

*10: AT-99

*11: AT-199

*12: AT-207

AT-58

*13: AT-247

*14: AT-81

*15: AT-35

*16: AT-100

*17: AT-199

*18: EC-55

SAT086JF

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

A/T Fluid Check

A/T Fluid Check

NAAT0021

FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK

NAAT0021S01

1. Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission case.

2. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in “D” position and wait a few minutes.

3. Stop engine.

4. Check for fresh leakage.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT638A

FLUID CONDITION CHECK

Fluid color

Dark or black with burned odor

Milky pink

Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and tacky

EC

NAAT0021S02

Suspected problem

Wear of frictional material

Water contamination — Road water entering through filler tube or breather

Oxidation — Over or under filling, —

Overheating

FE

CL

MT

FLUID LEVEL CHECK

Refer to MA-24, “Checking A/T Fluid”.

NAAT0021S03

TF

PD

AX

SU

Stall Test

NAAT0022

STALL TEST PROCEDURE

NAAT0022S01

1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil.

2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature.

ATF operating temperature:

50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

BR

ST

RS

SAT647B

BT

3. Set parking brake and block wheels.

4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.

I

It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified engine rpm on indicator.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT513G

AT-59

TB112100c 2000 Pathfinder July 2000

SM0E-1R50U2

ARROW INDICATES AMENDED INFORMATION

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Stall Test (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

SAT392H

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-61

Line Pressure Test

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Line Pressure Test

NAAT0023

I

Location of line pressure test ports.

I

Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts.

SAT209GA

LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE

NAAT0023S01

1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil.

2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature.

ATF operating temperature:

50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

SAT647B

3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.

SAT518GB

SAT519GB

4. Set parking brake and block wheels.

I

Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure test is being performed at stall speed.

SAT513G

AT-62

At idle

At stall speed

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Line Pressure Test (Cont’d)

5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.

I

When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the stall test procedure.

Line pressure:

Refer to SDS, AT-345.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT493G

Judgement

Line pressure is low in all positions.

Line pressure is low in particular position.

JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST

NAAT0023S02

Suspected parts

I Oil pump wear

I Control piston damage

I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

I Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged

I Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve

I Clogged strainer

I Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch

I For example, line pressure is:

— Low in “R” and “1” positions, but

— Normal in “D” and “2” positions.

Then, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit.

Refer to “CLUTCH AND BAND CHART”, AT-17.

Line pressure is high.

Line pressure is low.

I Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor

I Fluid temperature sensor damaged

I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking

I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit

I Pressure modifier valve sticking

I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

I Open in dropping resistor circuit

I Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor

I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking

I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit

I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking

I Pressure modifier valve sticking

I Pilot valve sticking

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT786A

BT

Road Test

NAAT0024

DESCRIPTION

NAAT0024S01

I

The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of

A/T and analyze causes of problems.

I The road test consists of the following three parts:

1. Check before engine is started

2. Check at idle

3. Cruise test

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-63

Road Test (Cont’d)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

I Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and items to check.

I

Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.

Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test.

Refer to “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIP-

TION” and “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS”,

AT-33 - AT-50 and AT-207 - AT-247.

SAT496G

1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP

1. Park vehicle on flat surface.

2. Move selector lever to “P” position.

3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

Wait at least 5 seconds.

1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED

NAAT0024S02

SAT967I

4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)

5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 2.

©

Go to “1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-210.

SAT325IA

AT-64

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

2 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP

Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds?

Road Test (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

Yes

No

SAT325IA

Yes or No

©

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (No Tools),

AT-46.

©

GO TO 3.

FE

CL

MT

3 CHECK NG ITEM

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.

Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (No Tools), AT-46.

©

Go to “2. Check at idle”, AT-66.

TF

RS

BT

HA

SC

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-65

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Road Test (Cont’d)

2. CHECK AT IDLE

1 CHECK ENGINE START

1. Park vehicle on flat surface.

2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

3. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.

4. Turn ignition switch to start position.

5. Is engine started?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 2.

©

Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-212.

2 CHECK ENGINE START

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Move selector lever to “D”, “1”, “2” or “R” position.

3. Turn ignition switch to start position.

4. Is engine started?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-212.

©

GO TO 3.

3 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Move selector lever to “P” position.

3. Release parking brake.

4. Push vehicle forward or backward.

5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?

=NAAT0024S03

Yes

No

SAT796A

Yes or No

©

Go to “3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed”, AT-213.

©

GO TO 4.

4 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

1. Apply parking brake.

2. Move selector lever to “N” position.

3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position and start engine.

4. Release parking brake.

5. Does vehicle move forward or backward?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Go to “4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves”, AT-214.

©

GO TO 5.

AT-66

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

5 CHECK SHIFT SHOCK

1. Apply foot brake.

2. Move selector lever to “R” position.

3. Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?

Road Test (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Go to “5. Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position”, AT-216.

© GO TO 6.

6 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

1. Release foot brake for several seconds.

2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?

Yes

No

Yes or No

© GO TO 7.

©

Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-218.

7 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE

1. Move selector lever to “D”, “2” and “1” position and check if vehicle creeps forward.

2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Go to “3. Cruise test”, AT-67.

©

Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position”, AT-221.

SAT082J

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

SMA185C

RS

BT

3. CRUISE TEST

I

Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.

NAAT0024S04

With CONSULT

NAAT0024S0401

I

Using CONSULT, conduct a cruise test and record the result.

I

Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per “Shift Schedule”.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-67

Road Test (Cont’d)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

CONSULT Setting Procedure

NAAT0024S0402

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.

2. Connect “CONSULT” to Data link connector for CONSULT.

Data link connector for CONSULT is located in instrument lower panel on driver side.

SAT326I

3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.

4. Touch “START”.

SEF392I

5. Touch “A/T”.

SAT974H

6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.

SAT385J

7. Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition.

SAT902H

AT-68

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

8. Touch “LONG TIME” and “ENTER” key.

Road Test (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT297C

9. Go back to SELECT MONITOR ITEM and touch “MAIN SIG-

NALS”.

10. Touch “START”.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT903H

11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”.

TF

PD

AX

SAT071H

12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.

SAT072H

13. Touch “DISPLAY”.

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

SAT301C

AT-69

Road Test (Cont’d)

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

14. Touch “PRINT”.

SAT904H

15. Touch “PRINT” again.

SAT905H

16. Check the monitor data printed out.

17. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3.

SAT906H

Without CONSULT

NAAT0024S0403

I

Throttle position sensor can be checked by voltage across terminals 41 and 42 of TCM.

SAT513J

AT-70

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Cruise Test — Part 1

1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D

1

) POSITION

1. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.

ATF operating temperature:

50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

2. Park vehicle on flat surface.

3. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position.

4. Move selector lever to “P” position.

5. Start engine.

6. Move selector lever to “D” position.

Road Test (Cont’d)

=NAAT0024S0404

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

SAT001J

MT

7. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway.

8. Does vehicle start from D

1

?

Read gear position.

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 2.

©

Go to “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

”, AT-224.

TF

PD

SAT952I

AX

SU

BR

ST

SAT953I

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-71

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Road Test (Cont’d)

2 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

1

TO D

2

)

Does A/T shift from D

1 to D

2 at the specified speed?

Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.

Specified speed when shifting from D

Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.

1 to D

2

:

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 3.

©

Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

1

,

D

2 or Does Not Kickdown: D

4

,

D

2

”, AT-227.

SAT954I

3 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

2

TO D

3

)

Does A/T shift from D

2 to D

3 at the specified speed?

Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.

Specified speed when shifting from D

Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.

2 to D

3

:

SAT955I

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 4.

©

Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

2

,

D

3

”, AT-230.

AT-72

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

)

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4 at the specified speed?

Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.

Specified speed when shifting from D

Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.

3 to D

4

:

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 5.

©

Go to “11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

,

D

4

”, AT-233.

5 CHECK LOCK-UP (D

4

TO D

4

L/U)

Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?

Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%.

Specified speed when lock-up occurs:

Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.

Road Test (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT956I

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 6.

©

Go to “12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up”, AT-236.

6 CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP

Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?

Yes

No

Yes or No

© GO TO 7.

©

Go to “13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition”, AT-238.

SAT957I

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-73

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Road Test (Cont’d)

7 CHECK LOCK-UP OFF (D

4

L/U TO D

4

)

1. Release accelerator pedal.

2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?

SAT958I

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 8.

©

Go to “14. Lock-up Is Not Released”, AT-240.

8 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D

4

TO D

3

)

1. Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.

2. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D

4

Read gear position and engine speed.

to D

3

?

Yes

No

SAT959I

Yes or No

©

1. Stop vehicle.

2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 2”, AT-75.

©

Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D

4

,

D

3

)”, AT-241.

AT-74

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Cruise Test — Part 2

1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D

1

) POSITION

1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.

2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.

3. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again.

4. Does vehicle start from D

1

?

Read gear position.

Road Test (Cont’d)

=NAAT0024S0405

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT495G

CL

MT

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 2.

©

Go to “16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D

1

”, AT-243.

2 CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D

3

TO D

4

TO D

2

)

1. Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.

2. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.

3. Does A/T shift from D

4 to D

2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully?

Read gear position and throttle position.

Yes

No

SU

BR

Yes or No

©

GO TO 3.

©

Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

,

D

4

Or Does Not Kickdown: D

4

,

D

2

”, AT-227.

SAT404H

ST

RS

BT

TF

PD

AX

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-75

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Road Test (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

2

TO D

3

)

Does A/T shift from D

2 to D

3 at the specified speed?

Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.

Specified speed when shifting from D

Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.

2 to D

3

:

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 4.

©

Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

2

,

D

3

”, AT-230.

4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

) AND ENGINE BRAKE

Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4

2 to D

3

.

and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?

Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.

SAT960I

SAT405H

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

1. Stop vehicle.

2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 3”, AT-77.

© Go to “11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

,

D

4

”, AT-233.

AT-76

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Cruise Test — Part 3

1 VEHICLE SPEED D

4

POSITION

1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.

2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.

3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D

4

.

Road Test (Cont’d)

=NAAT0024S0406

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT812A

CL

MT

© GO TO 2.

2 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D

4

TO D

3

)

1. Release accelerator pedal.

2. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position while driving in D

3. Does A/T shift from D

4 to D

3

(O/D OFF)?

Read gear position and vehicle speed.

4

.

Yes

No

SU

SAT999IA

Yes or No

©

GO TO 3.

©

Go to “17. A/T Does Not Shift: D

4

AT-244.

,

D

3

, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”,

BR

ST

RS

BT

TF

PD

AX

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-77

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Road Test (Cont’d)

3 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?

Yes

No

SAT999IA

Yes or No

©

GO TO 4.

©

Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D

4

,

D

3

)”, AT-241.

4 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D

3

TO D

2

)

1. Move selector lever from “D” to “2” position while driving in D

3

2. Does A/T shift from D

3

(O/D OFF) to 2

2

?

Read gear position.

(O/D OFF).

Yes

No

SAT791GB

Yes or No

©

GO TO 5.

©

Go to “18. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

AT-245.

,

D

2

, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position”,

AT-78

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

5 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?

Road Test (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

Yes

No

EC

SAT791GB

Yes or No

©

GO TO 6.

©

Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D

4

,

D

3

)”, AT-241.

FE

CL

MT

6 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (2

2

TO 1

1

)

1. Move selector lever from “2” to “1” position while driving in 2

2. Does A/T shift from 2

2 to 1

1 position?

2

.

Yes

No

TF

PD

AX

SAT778B

Yes or No

©

GO TO 7.

©

Go to “19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2

2

,

1

1

, When Selector lever “2” , “1” Position”, AT-246.

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-79

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION

Road Test (Cont’d)

7 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE

Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?

Yes

No

SAT778B

Yes or No

©

1. Stop vehicle.

2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),

AT-46.

©

Go to “20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake”, AT-247.

AT-80

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart

Numbers are arranged in the order of inspection.

Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item

1. Ignition switch and starter

Engine does not start in “N”, “P” positions.

AT-212

ON vehicle

Engine starts in position other than “N” and “P” positions.

AT-212

ON vehicle

Transmission noise in “P” and “N” positions.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Vehicle moves when changing into “P” position or parking gear does not disengage when shifted out of “P” position.

AT-212

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

Vehicle runs in “N” position.

AT-214

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

Vehicle will not run in “R” position (but runs in “D”, “2” and “1” positions).

Clutch slips.

Very poor acceleration.

AT-218

OFF vehicle

2. Control linkage

3. PNP switch

1. Control linkage

2. PNP switch

1. Fluid level

2. Line pressure

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

4. Revolution sensor and vehicle speed sensor

5. Engine speed signal

6. Oil pump

7. Torque converter

1. Control linkage

2. Parking components

1. Control linkage

2. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)

3. Forward clutch

4. Reverse clutch

5. Overrun clutch

1. Control linkage

2. Line pressure

3. Line pressure solenoid valve

4. Control valve assembly

5. Reverse clutch

6. High clutch

7. Forward clutch

8. Overrun clutch

9. Low & reverse brake

Symptom Chart

NAAT0026

GI

MA

AT-326

AT-162

AT-262

AT-303

AT-307

AT-309

AT-309

AT-313

AT-265

AT-262

AT-309

AT-303

AT-309

AT-265

AT-62

Reference Page

EL-9, “Schematic” and

SC-6, “System

Description”.

AT-265

AT-265

AT-265

AT-265

AT-59

AT-62

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-110, AT-199

AT-115

AT-286

AT-275

AT-265

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-81

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

Vehicle braked when shifting into “R” position.

Sharp shock in shifting from “N” to “D” position.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Vehicle will not run in “D” and “2” positions (but runs in “1” and “R” positions).

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Vehicle will not run in “D”, “1”, “2” positions (but runs in “R” position).

Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration.

AT-221

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Fluid level

2. Control linkage

3. Line pressure

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

5. Control valve assembly

6. High clutch

7. Brake band

8. Forward clutch

9. Overrun clutch

1. Engine idling rpm

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. A/T fluid temperature sensor

5. Engine speed signal

6. Line pressure solenoid valve

7. Control valve assembly

8. Accumulator N-D

9. Forward clutch

1. Control linkage

2. Low one-way clutch

1. Fluid level

2. Line pressure

3. Line pressure solenoid valve

4. Control valve assembly

5. Accumulator N-D

6. Reverse clutch

7. High clutch

8. Forward clutch

9. Forward one-way clutch

10. Low one-way clutch

AT-317

AT-59

AT-62

AT-162

AT-262

AT-262

AT-303

AT-307

AT-309

AT-309

AT-317

Reference Page

AT-59

AT-265

AT-62

AT-162

AT-262

AT-307

AT-322

AT-309

AT-309

AT-62

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-105

AT-115

AT-162

AT-262

AT-262

AT-309

AT-265

AT-82

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

Clutches or brakes slip somewhat in starting.

Excessive creep.

No creep at all.

AT-218, AT-221

Failure to change gear from “D

1

“D

2

”.

” to

Failure to change gear from “D

2

“D

3

”.

” to

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Fluid level

2. Control linkage

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

4. Line pressure

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

6. Control valve assembly

7. Accumulator N-D

8. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)

9. Forward clutch

10. Reverse clutch

11. Low & reverse brake

12. Oil pump

13. Torque converter

1. Engine idling rpm

1. Fluid level

2. Line pressure

3. Control valve assembly

4. Forward clutch

5. Oil pump

6. Torque converter

1. PNP switch

2. Control linkage

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Control valve assembly

5. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

6. Brake band

1. PNP switch

2. Control linkage

3. Shift solenoid valve B

4. Control valve assembly

5. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

6. High clutch

7. Brake band

AT-62

AT-262

AT-309

AT-286

AT-275

AT-265

AT-265

AT-169

AT-262

AT-110, AT-199

AT-322

AT-265

AT-265

AT-174

AT-262

AT-105, AT-199

AT-307

AT-322

Reference Page

AT-59

AT-265

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-162

AT-262

AT-262

AT-262

AT-309

AT-303

AT-313

AT-286

AT-275

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-59

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-83

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

Failure to change gear from “D

3

“D

4

”.

” to

Too high a gear change point from

“D

“D

1

3

” to “D

” to “D

2

4

”, from “D

2

”.

” to “D

3

AT-227, AT-230, AT-233

”, from

Gear change directly from “D

1 occurs.

” to “D

3

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Engine stops when shifting lever into

“R”, “D”, “2” and “1”.

Too sharp a shock in change from

“D

1

” to “D

2

”.

Too sharp a shock in change from

“D

2

” to “D

3

”.

Too sharp a shock in change from

“D

3

” to “D

4

”.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

1. PNP switch

Diagnostic Item

2. Control linkage

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor

6. Brake band

Reference Page

AT-265

AT-265

AT-169

AT-110, AT-199

AT-105

AT-322

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Shift solenoid valve B

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-110, AT-199

AT-169

AT-174

1. Fluid level

2. Accumulator 1-2

3. Brake band

1. Engine idling rpm

AT-59

AT-262

AT-322

AT-62

2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-148

3. Control valve assembly

4. Torque converter

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Line pressure

3. Accumulator 1-2

4. Control valve assembly

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor

6. Brake band

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Line pressure

3. Accumulator 2-3

4. Control valve assembly

5. High clutch

6. Brake band

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Line pressure

3. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)

4. Control valve assembly

5. Brake band

6. Overrun clutch

AT-262

AT-275

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-262

AT-262

AT-105

AT-322

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-262

AT-262

AT-307

AT-322

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-262

AT-262

AT-322

AT-309

AT-84

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

Almost no shock or clutches slipping in change from “D

1

” to “D

2

”.

Almost no shock or slipping in change from “D

2

” to “D

3

”.

ON vehicle

Almost no shock or slipping in change from “D

3

” to “D

4

”.

ON vehicle

Vehicle braked by gear change from

“D

1

” to “D

2

”.

Vehicle braked by gear change from

“D

2

” to “D

3

”.

Vehicle braked by gear change from

“D

3

” to “D

4

”.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

OFF vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. Accumulator 1-2

5. Control valve assembly

6. Brake band

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. Accumulator 2-3

5. Control valve assembly

6. High clutch

7. Brake band

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)

5. Control valve assembly

6. High clutch

7. Brake band

1. Fluid level

2. Reverse clutch

3. Low & reverse brake

4. High clutch

5. Low one-way clutch

1. Fluid level

2. Brake band

1. Fluid level

2. Overrun clutch

3. Forward one-way clutch

4. Reverse clutch

AT-313

AT-307

AT-317

AT-59

AT-322

AT-59

AT-309

AT-309

AT-303

AT-62

AT-262

AT-262

AT-307

AT-322

AT-59

AT-303

Reference Page

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-262

AT-262

AT-322

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-262

AT-262

AT-307

AT-322

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-85

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

Maximum speed not attained. Acceleration poor.

Failure to change gear from “D

4

“D

3

”.

” to

Failure to change gear from “D

3

“D

2

” or from “D

4

” to “D

2

”.

” to

Failure to change gear from “D

2

“D

1

” or from “D

3

” to “D

1

”.

” to

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Gear change shock felt during deceleration by releasing accelerator pedal. ON vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Fluid level

2. PNP switch

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Shift solenoid valve B

5. Control valve assembly

6. Reverse clutch

7. High clutch

8. Brake band

9. Low & reverse brake

10. Oil pump

11. Torque converter

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

4. Shift solenoid valve A

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

6. Control valve assembly

7. Low & reverse brake

8. Overrun clutch

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Shift solenoid valve B

5. Control valve assembly

6. High clutch

7. Brake band

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Shift solenoid valve B

5. Control valve assembly

6. Low one-way clutch

7. High clutch

8. Brake band

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Line pressure

3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

4. Control valve assembly

Reference Page

AT-59

AT-265

AT-169

AT-174

AT-262

AT-303

AT-307

AT-322

AT-313

AT-286

AT-275

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-188

AT-169

AT-162

AT-262

AT-313

AT-309

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-169

AT-174

AT-262

AT-307

AT-322

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-169

AT-174

AT-262

AT-317

AT-307

AT-322

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-188

AT-262

AT-86

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Condition Symptom

Too high a change point from “D

4

“D

3

“D

1

”, from “D

3

”.

” to “D

2

”, from “D

2

” to

” to

Kickdown does not operate when depressing pedal in “D

4

” within kickdown vehicle speed.

Kickdown operates or engine overruns when depressing pedal in “D kickdown vehicle speed limit.

4

” beyond ON vehicle

Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D depressing pedal.

4

” to “D

3

” when

Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D depressing pedal.

4

” to “D

2

” when

Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D depressing pedal.

3

” to “D

2

” when

ON vehicle

ON vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Shift solenoid valve B

1. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Shift solenoid valve B

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

5. Control valve assembly

6. High clutch

7. Forward clutch

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

5. Shift solenoid valve A

6. Control valve assembly

7. Brake band

8. Forward clutch

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

5. Control valve assembly

6. A/T fluid temperature sensor

7. Accumulator 2-3

8. Brake band

9. Forward clutch

10. High clutch

Reference Page

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-110, AT-199

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-110, AT-199

AT-169

AT-174

AT-110, AT-199

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-169

AT-174

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-162

AT-262

AT-307

AT-309

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-162

AT-169

AT-262

AT-322

AT-309

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-162

AT-262

AT-105

AT-262

AT-322

AT-309

AT-307

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-87

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D

4

” or “D when depressing pedal.

3

” to “D

1

Vehicle will not run in any position.

Transmission noise in “D”, “2”, “1” and

“R” positions.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Failure to change from “D

AT-241

3

” to “2” when changing lever into “2” position.

ON vehicle

Gear change from “2

2 position.

” to “2

3

” in “2”

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Fluid level

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

3. Line pressure

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

5. Control valve assembly

6. Forward clutch

7. Forward one-way clutch

8. Low one-way clutch

1. Fluid level

2. Control linkage

3. Line pressure

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

5. Oil pump

6. High clutch

7. Brake band

AT-309

AT-317

AT-59

AT-265

AT-62

AT-162

AT-286

AT-307

AT-322

Reference Page

AT-59

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-162

AT-262

AT-309

8. Low & reverse brake

9. Torque converter

1. Fluid level

2. Torque converter

AT-313

AT-275

AT-59

AT-275

1. PNP switch

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

AT-265

EC-181, “Description”.

3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-148

4. Shift solenoid valve B

5. Shift solenoid valve A

6. Control valve assembly

7. Control linkage

8. Brake band

9. Overrun clutch

AT-174

AT-169

AT-262

AT-265

AT-322

AT-309

1. PNP switch

AT-265

AT-88

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

Engine brake does not operate in “1” position.

AT-243

ON vehicle

Gear change from “1

1 position.

” to “1

2

” in “1”

Does not change from “1

2

“1” position.

” to “1

1

” in

Large shock changing from “1

2 in “1” position.

” to “1

1

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Transmission overheats.

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

1. PNP switch

Diagnostic Item

2. Control linkage

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

4. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

5. Shift solenoid valve A

6. Control valve assembly

7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

8. Overrun clutch

9. Low & reverse brake

1. PNP switch

2. Control linkage

1. PNP switch

2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

3. Shift solenoid valve A

4. Control valve assembly

5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

6. Overrun clutch

7. Low & reverse brake

1. Control valve assembly

2. Low & reverse brake

1. Fluid level

2. Engine idling rpm

3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

4. Line pressure

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

6. Control valve assembly

7. Oil pump

8. Reverse clutch

9. High clutch

10. Brake band

11. Forward clutch

12. Overrun clutch

13. Low & reverse brake

14. Torque converter

Reference Page

AT-265

AT-265

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-105, AT-199

AT-169

AT-262

AT-188

AT-309

AT-313

AT-265

AT-265

AT-265

AT-110, AT-199

AT-169

AT-262

AT-188

AT-309

AT-313

AT-262

AT-313

AT-59

AT-62

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-62

AT-162

AT-262

AT-286

AT-303

AT-307

AT-322

AT-309

AT-309

AT-313

AT-275

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-89

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom

ATF shoots out during operation.

White smoke emitted from exhaust pipe during operation.

Offensive smell at fluid charging pipe.

OFF vehicle

Torque converter is not locked up.

Torque converter clutch piston slip.

Condition

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Lock-up point is extremely high or low.

AT-236

ON vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Fluid level

2. Reverse clutch

3. High clutch

4. Brake band

5. Forward clutch

6. Overrun clutch

7. Low & reverse brake

1. Fluid level

2. Torque converter

3. Oil pump

4. Reverse clutch

5. High clutch

6. Brake band

7. Forward clutch

8. Overrun clutch

AT-313

AT-59

AT-275

AT-286

AT-303

AT-307

AT-322

AT-309

AT-309

Reference Page

AT-59

AT-303

AT-307

AT-322

AT-309

AT-309

9. Low & reverse brake

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

3. PNP switch

4. Engine speed signal

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor

6. Line pressure

7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-148

8. Control valve assembly

AT-262

9. Torque converter

1. Fluid level

AT-275

AT-59

2. Line pressure

AT-62

3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-148

4. Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-162

AT-313

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-110, AT-199

AT-265

AT-115

AT-105

AT-62

5. Line pressure solenoid valve

6. Control valve assembly

7. Torque converter

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

AT-162

AT-262

AT-275

EC-181, “Description”.

2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

AT-110, AT-199

3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-148

4. Control valve assembly

AT-262

AT-90

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition

A/T does not shift to “D

4

” when driving with overdrive control switch “ON”.

ON vehicle

OFF vehicle

Engine is stopped at “R”, “D”, “2” and

“1” positions.

ON vehicle

Diagnostic Item

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)

2. PNP switch

3. Revolution sensor and speed sensor

4. Shift solenoid valve A

5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve

6. Control valve assembly

7. A/T fluid temperature sensor

8. Line pressure

9. Brake band

10. Overrun clutch

AT-105

AT-62

AT-322

AT-309

1. Fluid level

AT-59

2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-148

3. Shift solenoid valve B

4. Shift solenoid valve A

5. Control valve assembly

AT-174

AT-169

AT-262

Reference Page

EC-181, “Description”.

AT-265

AT-110, AT-199

AT-169

AT-188

AT-262

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-91

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TCM Terminals and Reference Value

TCM Terminals and Reference Value

=NAAT0027

PREPARATION

NAAT0027S01

I

Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48 by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”.

SAT216J

4

5*1

6*1

7*1

8

9

Terminal

No.

Wire color

1

2

3

10

GY

W/R

Item

Line pressure solenoid valve

BR/Y

Line pressure solenoid valve

(with dropping resistor)

G/OR

PU/W

P/B

P

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

DT1

DT2

DT3

Power source

SAT217JB

TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT

NAAT0027S02

TCM INSPECTION TABLE

NAAT0027S03

(Data are reference values.)

Condition

Judgement standard

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

1.5 - 3.0V

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

0.5V or less

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

5 - 14V

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

0.5V or less

When A/T performs lock-up.

8 - 15V

When A/T does not perform lock- up.

When turning ignition switch to “ON”.

When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.

1V or less

Battery voltage

1V or less

AT-92

Terminal

No.

Wire color

11

12

13

14

15*1

16

17

18

L/W

L/R

GY

Y/G

OR/W

OR/B

B/Y

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

Item

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

O/D OFF indicator lamp

OBD-II output

Closed throttle position switch

(in throttle position switch)

Wide open throttle position switch

(in throttle position switch)

ASCD cruise signal

Condition

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

4

”.)

When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.

(When driving in “D

2

” or “D

3

”.)

When shift solenoid valve B operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

2

”.)

When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.

(When driving in “D

3

” or “D

4

”.)

When setting overdrive control switch in “ON” position.

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

1V or less

Battery voltage

1V or less

Battery voltage

When setting overdrive control switch in

“OFF” position.

1V or less

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-

NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.

Battery voltage

When depressing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-

NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.

When depressing accelerator pedal more than half-way after warming up engine.

1V or less

Battery voltage

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

1V or less

When ASCD cruise is being performed.

(“CRUISE” light comes on.)

Battery voltage

When ASCD cruise is not being performed.

(“CRUISE” light does not comes on.)

1V or less

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

19 W/R Power source Same as No. 10

RS

BT

20

21

22

23

L/B

GY

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

Overdrive control switch

When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate.

When setting overdrive control switch in “ON” position

When setting overdrive control switch in

“OFF” position

1V or less

Battery voltage

1V or less

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-93

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

Terminal

No.

Wire color

24

25

26

27

28

W/G

B

G

G/W

R/Y

Item

ASCD OD cut signal

Ground

PNP switch “1” position

PNP switch “2” position

Power source

(Memory back-up) or

Condition

When “ACCEL” set switch on ASCD cruise is released.

When “ACCEL” set switch on ASCD cruise is applied.

When setting selector lever to “1” position.

Judgement standard

More than

4.5V

1V or less

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions.

1V or less

When setting selector lever to “2” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions.

1V or less

When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.

Battery voltage

29

30*2

31*2

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

W

W

L

P/B

L

Y

P

Revolution sensor

(Measure in AC range)

Throttle position sensor

(Power source)

PNP switch “D” position

PNP switch “R” position

PNP switch “N” or

“P” position

When turning ignition switch to “ON”.

When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH).

When vehicle parks.

Battery voltage

1V or more

Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.

0V

4.5 - 5.5V

When setting selector lever to “D” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions.

1V or less

When setting selector lever to “R” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions.

1V or less

When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions.

1V or less

AT-94

Terminal

No.

Wire color

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

Item Condition

Judgement standard

GI

MA

39 W/B

Engine speed signal

When engine runs at idle speed.

0.5 - 2.5V

EM

40

41

W/L

P

Vehicle speed sensor

Throttle position sensor

When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2

MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.

When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine.

(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)

Voltage varies between less than 1.0V and more than

4.5V.

Fully-closed throttle:

Approximately

0.5V

Fully-open throttle:

Approximately

4V

42

45

46

B

Throttle position sensor

(Ground)

When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).

47 R

A/T fluid temperature sensor

48 B Ground

When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).

*1: These terminals are connected to the ECM.

*2: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT.

Approximately

1.5V

Approximately

0.5V

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

HA

SC

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-95

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY

Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN

Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN

NAAT0185

AT-96

MAT752A

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

10

19

W/R

W/R

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY

Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0185S01

Power source

Power source

Condition

When turning ignition switch to “ON”.

When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.

Same as No. 10

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

1V or less

GI

MA

EM

LC

25 B Ground — —

EC

28 R/Y

Power source

(Memory back-up) or

When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.

When turning ignition switch to “ON”.

Battery voltage

Battery voltage

FE

CL

48 B Ground — —

MT

1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.

Voltage: Battery voltage

SU

BR

OK

NG

SAT514J

3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28

(Main harness)

I Ignition switch and fuse

Refer to EL-9, “Schematic”.

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-97

TF

PD

AX

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY

Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)

2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.

3. Check continuity between terminals 25, 48 and ground.

Continuity should exist.

OK

NG

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

SAT515J

AT-98

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Description

Description

NAAT0028

I

The PNP switch assemble includes a transmission range switch.

I

The transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the TCM.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT516J

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

26

27

34

35

36

G

G/W

L

Y

P

PNP switch “1” position

PNP switch “2” position

PNP switch “D” position

PNP switch “R” position

PNP switch “N” or

“P” position

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0028S02

Condition

When setting selector lever to “1” position.

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less

When setting selector lever to “2” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less

When setting selector lever to “D” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less

When setting selector lever to “R” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less

When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” position.

Battery voltage

When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

Diagnostic trouble code

: PNP SW/CIRC

: P0705

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position.

Check item (Possible cause)

I Harness or connectors

(The PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.)

I PNP switch

NAAT0028S03

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-99

Description (Cont’d)

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

SEF895K

SAT911I

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0028S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least

5 consecutive seconds.

VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON” or “OFF”)

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “ON” or “OFF” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle position sensor more than 1.3V and driving for more than 5 seconds.

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “ON” or “OFF” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-100

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW

NAAT0186

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT753A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-101

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0029

1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT)

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly.

OK

NG

SAT761I

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

Check the following items:

I PNP switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-104.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)

I Diode (P, N position)

AT-102

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT)

Without CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each position.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

MTBL0205

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

SAT517J

Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?

© GO TO 3.

©

Check the following items:

I PNP switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-104.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)

I Diode (P, N position)

TF

PD

AX

SU

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-100.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-103

Component Inspection

DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

SAT517GB

Component Inspection

NAAT0030

PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH

NAAT0030S02

1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through each position.

Terminal No.

Lever position

P

R

N

D

2

1

1 - 2

3 - 5

1 - 2

3 - 7

3 - 8

3 - 9

3 - 4

3 - 6

SAT843BG

2. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.

3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-265.

SAT807B

4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.

5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-265.

6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.

SAT386HC

AT-104

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Description

Description

NAAT0031

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.

GI

MA

SAT342HA

FE

CL

MT

SAT021J

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR

MODE

NAAT0031S04

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Condition

Cold [20°C (68°F)]

"

Hot [80°C (176°F)]

Specification

Approximately 1.5V

"

Approximately 0.5V

TF

PD

AX

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0031S02

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

42 B

Throttle position sensor

(Ground)

Condition

Judgement standard

SU

BR

ST

47 R

A/T fluid temperature sensor

When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).

When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).

Approximately

1.5V

Approximately

0.5V

RS

BT

Diagnostic trouble code

: ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC

: P0710

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

Check item (Possible cause)

NAAT0031S03

TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.

I Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

I A/T fluid temperature sensor

HA

SC

EM

LC

EC

EL

IDX

AT-105

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Description (Cont’d)

SEF895K

SAT911I

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0031S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least

10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)

CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more

VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for more than 10 minutes (Total).

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for more than 10 minutes (Total).

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-106

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS

NAAT0187

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT754A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-107

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assmebly.

3. Check resistance between terminals 33 and 35 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].

NAAT0032

Is resistance approx. 2.5 k

?

Yes (With CONSULT)

©

GO TO 2.

Yes (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 3.

No

©

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check the following items:

I A/T fluid temperature sensor

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-109.

I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT)

With CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.

Voltage:

Cold [20°C (68°F)]

Hot [80°C (176°F)]:

Approximately 1.5V

0.5V

SAT191IA

OK

NG

SAT076H

OK or NG

© GO TO 4.

©

Check the following item:

I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)

AT-108

DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT)

Without CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.

Voltage:

Cold [20°C (68°F)]

Hot [80°C (176°F)]:

Approximately 1.5V

0.5V

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

OK

NG

FE

SAT518J

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following item:

I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)

CL

MT

4 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-106.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

TF

PD

AX

SAT687I

SU

Component Inspection

NAAT0033

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NAAT0033S01

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

I

Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 while changing temperature as shown at left.

Temperature °C (°F)

20 (68)

80 (176)

Resistance

Approximately 2.5 k Ω

Approximately 0.3 k Ω

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-109

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Description

Description

NAAT0034

The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the out put shaft parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.

29 W

SAT516J

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Condition

Revolution sensor

(Measure in AC range)

When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH).

When vehicle parks.

NAAT0034S02

1V or more

Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.

0V

Judgement standard

42 B

Throttle position sensor

(Ground)

— —

Diagnostic trouble code

: VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT

: P0720

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.

NAAT0034S03

Check item (Possible cause)

I Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

I Revolution sensor

AT-110

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Description (Cont’d)

SAT974H

SAT385J

SEF895K

SAT911I

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0034S01

CAUTION:

I

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

I

Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

2) Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value.

If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,

AT-202.

If the check result is OK, go to following step.

3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

4) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least

5 consecutive seconds.

VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more

THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Driving pattern: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.

If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,

AT-113.

If the check result is OK, go to following step.

5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.

CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more

THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Driving pattern: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-111

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T

NAAT0188

AT-112

MAT755A

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0035

1 CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-114.

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 2.

OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 3.

NG

©

Repair or replace revolution sensor.

GI

MA

EM

LC

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT)

With CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.

Check the value changes according to driving speed.

EC

FE

CL

MT

OK

NG

TF

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between revolution sensor and ECM (Main harness)

I Ground circuit for ECM

Refer to EC-137, “WIRING DIAGRAM”.

SAT076H

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-113

DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT)

Without CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 29 and ground while driving.

(Measure with AC range.)

Voltage:

At 0 km/h (0 MPH):

0V

At 30 km/h (19 MPH):

1V or more

(Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.)

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between revolution sensor and ECM (Main harness)

I Ground circuit for ECM

Refer to EC-137, “WIRING DIAGRAM”.

SAT519J

4 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-111.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

SAT210IA

Component Inspection

REVOLUTION SENSOR

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

I

Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3.

Terminal No.

1

2

1

2

3

3

NAAT0036

NAAT0036S01

Resistance

500 - 650 Ω

No continuity

No continuity

AT-114

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

Description

Description

The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.

NAAT0037

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0037S02

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item Condition

Judgement standard

GI

MA

EM

39 W/B

Diagnostic trouble code

: ENGINE SPEED SIG

: P0725

LC

Engine speed signal

When engine runs at idle speed.

0.5 - 2.5V

EC

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

Check item (Possible cause)

NAAT0037S03

FE

TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM.

I Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

CL

MT

SEF895K

SAT911I

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0037S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least

10 consecutive seconds.

VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 10 seconds.

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 10 consecutive seconds.

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-115

Description (Cont’d)

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-116

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS

Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS

NAAT0189

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT756A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-117

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 2.

OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 3.

NG

©

Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-454, “IGNITION COIL &

POWER TRANSISTOR”.

NAAT0038

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT)

With CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.

Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.

Yes

No

Does battery voltage (idle speed) 0.5 - 2.5V?

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM

I Resistor

I Ignition coil

Refer to EC-454, “IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR”.

SAT076H

AT-118

DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

GI

3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT)

Without CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 39 and ground.

MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT520J

FE

Yes

No

Does battery voltage (idle speed) 0.5 - 2.5V?

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM

I Resistor

I Ignition coil

Refer to EC-454, “IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR”.

4 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-115.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-119

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION

Description

Description

NAAT0039

I

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.

I

This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.

I

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

4

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

11

12

L/W

L/R

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0039S02

Condition

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

4

”.)

When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.

(When driving in “D

2

” or “D

3

”.)

When shift solenoid valve B operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

2

”.)

When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.

(When driving in “D

3

” or “D

4

”.)

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

1V or less

Battery voltage

1V or less

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

NAAT0039S03

This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:

Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B

A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor

B: Engine speed signal from ECM

C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes

If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.

This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.

Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open

*: P0731 is detected.

1

1

2*

4*

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

3

4

4

3

4

Diagnostic trouble code

: A/T 1ST GR FNCTN

: P0731

Malfunction is detected when ...

A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

Check item (Possible cause)

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

AT-120

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

SAT974H

SAT385J

SAT021J

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0039S01

CAUTION:

I

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

I

Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITIONS:

Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with

CONSULT.

2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.

FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V

If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).

3) Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.

4) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step

4)

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal.

5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or

“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to

“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-124.

If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to the following step.

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.

I

If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

6) Stop vehicle.

7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4

No malfunction exists 1 , 2 , 3 , 4

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-121

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

Malfunction for P0731 exists.

2 , 2 , 3 , 3

4 , 3 , 3 , 4

8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)

Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-124.

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

With GST

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-122

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST

Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST

NAAT0190

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT757A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-123

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Shift solenoid valve B

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-125.

NAAT0040

SAT648I

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.

2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly.

Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-290.

2. Check to ensure that:

I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.

I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.

I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.

I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

Repair control valve assembly.

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-121.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

AT-124

SAT367H

DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION

Component Inspection

Component Inspection

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

=NAAT0041

NAAT0041S01

Resistance Check

NAAT0041S0101

I

Check resistance between terminals (3 or 2) and ground.

Resistance (Approx.) Solenoid valve

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

3

Terminal No.

Ground

2

20 - 40 Ω

SAT649I

Operation Check

NAAT0041S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (3 or 2) and ground.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT648I

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-125

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION

Description

Description

NAAT0042

I

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.

I

This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.

I

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

4

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

12 L/R

Shift solenoid valve B

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0042S02

Condition

When shift solenoid valve B operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

2

”.)

When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.

(When driving in “D

3

” or “D

4

”.)

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

1V or less

Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open

*: P0732 is detected.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

NAAT0042S03

This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:

Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B

A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor

B: Engine speed signal from ECM

C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes

If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.

This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

4 3* 3 4

Diagnostic trouble code

: A/T 2ND GR FNCTN

: P0732

Malfunction is detected when ...

A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

Check item (Possible cause)

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

AT-126

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

SAT974H

SAT385J

SAT021J

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0042S01

CAUTION:

I

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

I

Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITIONS:

Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with

CONSULT.

2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.

FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V

If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).

3) Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.

4) Accelerate vehicle to 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step

4)

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal.

5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or

“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to

“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-130.

If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to following step.

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.

I

If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

6) Stop vehicle.

7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4

No malfunction exists

Malfunction for P0732 exists.

1 , 2 , 3 , 4

4 , 3 , 3 , 4

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-127

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC

PROCEDURE”, AT-130. Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

With GST

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-128

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND

Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND

NAAT0191

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT758A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-129

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.

I Shift solenoid valve B

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-131.

NAAT0043

SAT650I

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.

2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly.

Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-290.

2. Check to ensure that:

I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.

I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.

I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.

I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 3.

© Repair control valve assembly.

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-127.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

AT-130

SAT367H

DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION

Component Inspection

Component Inspection

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0044

NAAT0044S01

Resistance Check

I

Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.

Solenoid valve

Shift solenoid valve B 2

Terminal No.

Ground

NAAT0044S0101

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40 Ω

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT651I

Operation Check

NAAT0044S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT650I

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-131

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION

Description

Description

NAAT0045

I

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.

I

This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.

I

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band, etc.

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

4

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

11 L/W

Shift solenoid valve A

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0045S02

Condition

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

4

”.)

When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.

(When driving in “D

2

” or “D

3

”.)

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

1V or less

Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

NAAT0045S03

This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:

Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B

A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor

B: Engine speed signal from ECM

C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes

If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.

This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed.

1 2 3 4

1

1

2

1

3

4*

4

4

*: P0733 is detected.

Diagnostic trouble code

: A/T 3RD GR FNCTN

: P0733

Malfunction is detected when ...

A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

Check item (Possible cause)

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

AT-132

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

SAT974H

SAT385J

SAT021J

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0045S01

CAUTION:

I

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

I

Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITIONS:

Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with

CONSULT.

2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.

FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V

If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).

3) Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.

4) Accelerate vehicle to 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step

4)

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal.

5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56

MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COM-

PLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to

“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-136.

If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to following step.

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.

I

If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

6) Stop vehicle.

7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4

No malfunction exists.

Malfunction for P0733 exists.

1 , 2 , 3 , 4

1 , 1 , 4 , 4

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-133

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC

PROCEDURE”, AT-136.

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

With GST

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE

POSI” from a speed of 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE

POSI” from a speed of 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-134

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD

Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD

NAAT0192

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT759A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-135

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.

I Shift solenoid valve A

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-137.

NAAT0046

SAT653I

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.

2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly.

Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-290.

2. Check to ensure that:

I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.

I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.

I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.

I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 3.

© Repair control valve assembly.

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-133.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

AT-136

SAT367H

DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION

Component Inspection

Component Inspection

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0047

NAAT0047S01

Resistance Check

I

Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.

Solenoid valve

Shift solenoid valve A 3

Terminal No.

Ground

NAAT0047S0101

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40 Ω

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT654I

Operation Check

NAAT0047S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT653I

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-137

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Description

Description

NAAT0048

I

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.

I

This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.

I

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR

MODE

NAAT0048S04

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty

Line pressure solenoid valve duty

Condition

Lock-up “OFF”

"

Lock-up “ON”

Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)

"

Large throttle opening (High line pressure)

Specification

Approximately 4%

"

Approximately 94%

Approximately 24%

"

Approximately 95%

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

4

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

1

2

11

12

G/Y

BR/Y

L/W

L/R

Line pressure solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve

(with dropping resistor)

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0048S02

Condition

Judgement standard

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

1.5 - 2.5V

0.5V or less

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

4

”.)

When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.

(When driving in “D

2

” or “D

3

”.)

When shift solenoid valve B operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

2

”.)

When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.

(When driving in “D

3

” or “D

4

”.)

5 - 14V

0.5V or less

Battery voltage

1V or less

Battery voltage

1V or less

AT-138

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed

*: P0734 is detected.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

=NAAT0048S03

This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:

Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B

A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor

B: Engine speed signal from ECM

C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes

If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.

This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

1 2 2 1*

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

Diagnostic trouble code

: A/T 4TH GR FNCTN

: P0734

Malfunction is detected when ...

A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.

Check item (Possible cause)

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Line pressure solenoid valve

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-139

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

SAT974H

SAT385J

SAT021J

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0048S01

CAUTION:

I

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

I

Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITIONS:

Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with

CONSULT.

2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.

FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V

If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).

3) Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.

4) Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step

4)

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal.

5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of

“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34

MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or

“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to

“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-143.

If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to following step.

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.

I

If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

6) Stop vehicle.

7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)

Vehicle condition

Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4

No malfunction exists

Malfunction for P0734 exists.

1 , 2 , 3 , 4

1 , 2 , 2 , 1

AT-140

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Description (Cont’d)

8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC

PROCEDURE”, AT-143.

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

With GST

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE

POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55km/h (28 to 34PH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.

THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Depress accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE

POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)

4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-141

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH

Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH

NAAT0193

AT-142

MAT760A

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0049

1 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

)

During “Cruise test Part 1”, AT-71.

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4 at the specified speed?

GI

MA

EM

LC

Yes or No

EC

SAT988H

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

©

GO TO 9.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-62.

OK

NG

© GO TO 3.

©

GO TO 6.

OK or NG

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-143

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SOLENOID VALVES

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.

SAT158J

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Replace solenoid valve assembly.

4 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.

2. Check to ensure that:

I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.

I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.

I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.

I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

OK

NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

Repair control valve.

OK or NG

AT-144

SAT367H

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

)

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4 at the specified speed?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 9.

©

Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

GI

MA

EM

6 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 7.

©

Replace solenoid valve assembly.

TF

PD

AX

SAT158J

SU

BR

HA

SC

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-145

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.

2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.

I Pressure regulator valve

I Pilot valve

I Pressure modifier valve

SAT367H

OK

NG

©

GO TO 8.

©

Repair control valve.

OK or NG

8 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

)

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4 at the specified speed?

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 9.

© Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

9 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-140.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.

AT-146

DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION

Component Inspection

Component Inspection

SOLENOID VALVES

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0050

NAAT0050S01

Resistance Check

NAAT0050S0101

I

Check resistance between terminals (3, 2 or 6) and ground.

Resistance (Approx.) Solenoid valve

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

Line pressure solenoid valve

2

6

3

Terminal No.

Ground

20 - 40 Ω

2.5 - 5 Ω

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT159J

Operation Check

NAAT0050S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2 or 6) and ground.

TF

PD

AX

SAT158J

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-147

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Description

Description

NAAT0051

The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in “D

4

”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled.

Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.

SAT342HA

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR

MODE

NAAT0051S02

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty

Condition

Lock-up “OFF”

"

Lock-up “ON”

Specification

Approximately 4%

"

Approximately 94%

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Condition

When A/T performs lock-up.

NAAT0051S03

Judgement standard

8 - 15V

3 G/OR

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

When A/T does not perform lock-up.

1V or less

Diagnostic trouble code

: TCC SOLENOID/CIRC

: P0740

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.

NAAT0051S04

Check item (Possible cause)

I Harness or connectors

(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-148

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Description (Cont’d)

SEF895K

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0051S01

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT and wait at least 1 second.

With GST

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

SAT911I

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-149

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV

NAAT0194

AT-150

MAT761A

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0052

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.

3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT336I

CL

MT

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 10 - 20

?

©

GO TO 2.

©

1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-152.

I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2 CHECK RESISTANCE

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.

3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and TCM harness connector terminal 3.

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 0

?

© GO TO 3.

© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

SAT538J

SC

EL

IDX

AT-151

DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-149.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

SAT160J

Component Inspection

NAAT0053

TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

NAAT0053S01

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

Resistance Check

I

Check resistance between terminal 7 and ground.

Terminal No.

NAAT0053S0101

Resistance (Approx.) Solenoid valve

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

7 Ground 10 - 20 Ω

Operation Check

NAAT0053S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground.

SAT161J

AT-152

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Description

Description

NAAT0054

I

This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.

I

This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.

I

This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR

MODE

NAAT0054S02

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty

Condition

Lock-up “OFF”

"

Lock-up “ON”

Specification

Approximately 4%

"

Approximately 94%

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0054S03

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

1

2

G/Y

BR/Y

Line pressure solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve

(with dropping resistor)

Condition

Judgement standard

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

1.5 - 2.5V

0.5V or less

5 - 14V

0.5V or less

TF

PD

AX

SU

When A/T performs lock-up.

8 - 15V

BR

3 G/OR

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

When A/T does not perform lock- up.

1V or less

ST

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

NAAT0054S04

This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:

Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B

A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor

B: Engine speed signal from ECM

C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes

If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.

This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-153

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Description (Cont’d)

Gear position supposed by TCM

In case of gear position with no malfunctions

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed

*: P0744 is detected.

1

1

1

2

2

2

3

3

2

Diagnostic trouble code

: A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

: P0744

4

4

1*

Malfunction is detected when ...

A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.

Check item (Possible cause)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

I Each clutch

I Hydraulic control circuit

SAT974H

SAT385J

SAT021J

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0054S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with

CONSULT.

2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.

FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V

If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).

3) Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.

4) Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.)

THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4)

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94%

VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50

MPH)

I

Check that “GEAR” shows “4”.

I

For shift schedule, refer to SDS, AT-345.

AT-154

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Description (Cont’d)

I

If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE

DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.

5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)

Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-157.

Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

With GST

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Start vehicle with selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position and throttle opening 1.0/8 - 2.0/8. Check that vehicle runs through gear shift of D

1

,

D

2

,

D

3

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

,

D

4

,

D

4 lock-up, in accordance

with shift schedule. Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

No Tools

1) Start engine and warm up ATF.

2) Start vehicle with selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position and throttle opening 1.0/8 - 2.0/8. Check that vehicle runs through gear shift of D lock-up, in accordance

,

D

2

,

D

3

,

D

4

,

D

4

with shift schedule. Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

RS

BT

HA

SC

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-155

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG

NAAT0195

AT-156

MAT762A

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

)

During “Cruise test Part 1”, AT-71.

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4 at the specified speed?

Diagnostic Procedure

=NAAT0055

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT988H

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

Yes or No

© I GO TO 10.

I And check for proper lock-up.

© GO TO 2.

2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-62.

OK or NG

OK

NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

GO TO 6.

3 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.

2. Check to ensure that:

I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.

I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.

I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.

I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

OK

NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Repair control valve.

OK or NG

RS

BT

SAT367H

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-157

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

)

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4 at the specified speed?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 5.

©

Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

5 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-154.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© I GO TO 10.

I And check for proper lock-up.

6 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check line pressure solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-161.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 7.

©

Replace solenoid valve assembly.

AT-158

SAT158J

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.

2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.

I Pressure regulator valve

I Pilot valve

I Pressure modifier valve

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

OK

NG

©

GO TO 8.

©

Repair control valve.

OK or NG

8 CHECK SHIFT UP (D

3

TO D

4

)

Does A/T shift from D

3 to D

4 at the specified speed?

Yes

No

Yes or No

© GO TO 9.

© Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

9 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-154.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© I GO TO 10.

I And check for proper lock-up.

10 CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION

During “Cruise test Part 1”, AT-71.

Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Perform “Cruise test Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.

©

GO TO 11.

SAT367H

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

11 CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation.

Refer to AT-161.

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 12.

©

Replace solenoid valve assembly.

AT-159

SC

EL

IDX

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

12 CHECK CONTROL VALVE

1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.

2. Check control valves for sticking.

I Torque converter clutch control valve

I Torque converter clutch relief valve

SAT367H

OK

NG

©

GO TO 13.

©

Repair control valve

OK or NG

13 CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION

Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 14.

©

Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

14 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-154.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.

AT-160

DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION

Component Inspection

Component Inspection

SOLENOID VALVES

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0056

NAAT0056S01

Resistance Check

NAAT0056S0101

I

Check resistance between terminals (6 or 7) and ground.

Solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

6

Terminal No.

Ground

7

Resistance (Approx.)

2.5 - 5 Ω

10 - 20 Ω

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT159J

Operation Check

NAAT0056S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (6 or 7) and ground.

TF

PD

AX

SAT158J

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-161

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Description

Description

NAAT0057

The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.

The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is

“OFF”.

SAT341H

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR

MODE

NAAT0057S02

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item Condition Specification

Line pressure solenoid valve duty

Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)

"

Large throttle opening (High line pressure)

Approximately 24%

"

Approximately 95%

NOTE:

The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0057S03

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item Condition

Judgement standard

1

2

G/Y

BR/Y

Line pressure solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve

(with dropping resistor)

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.

1.5 - 2.5V

0.5V or less

5 - 14V

0.5V or less

Diagnostic trouble code

: L/PRESS SOL/CIRC

: P0745

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

NAAT0057S04

Check item (Possible cause)

I Harness or connectors

(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

AT-162

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

SEF895K

SAT911I

Description (Cont’d)

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0057S01

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.

With GST

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.

2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-163

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV

Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV

NAAT0196

AT-164

MAT763A

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.

3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0058

GI

MA

EM

LC

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 2.5 - 5

?

©

GO TO 2.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly.

Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Line pressure solenoid valve

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-167.

I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

EC

FE

SAT192IA

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-165

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.

3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 2.

Yes

No

SAT539J

©

GO TO 3.

Is resistance approx. 11.2 - 12.8

?

©

Check the following items:

I Dropping resistor

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-167.

I Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)

AT-166

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 1.

GI

MA

FE

CL

Yes

No

MT

Is resistance approx. 0

?

©

GO TO 4.

©

Repair or replace harness between TCM terminal 1 and terminal cord assembly.

SAT540J

TF

PD

4 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-163.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AX

SU

BR

ST

EM

LC

EC

RS

SAT657I

BT

Component Inspection

LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0059

NAAT0059S01

Resistance Check

I

Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.

Solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve 6

Terminal No.

Ground

NAAT0059S0101

Resistance (Approx.)

2.5 - 5

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-167

DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE

Component Inspection (Cont’d)

Operation Check

NAAT0059S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 6 and ground.

SAT658I

DROPPING RESISTOR

I

Check resistance between two terminals.

Resistance: 11.2 - 12.8

NAAT0059S02

SAT848BD

AT-168

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

Description

Description

NAAT0060

Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT341H

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

4

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

EC

FE

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

11 L/W

Shift solenoid valve A

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0060S02

Condition

When shift solenoid valve A operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

4

”.)

When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.

(When driving in “D

2

” or “D

3

”.)

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

1V or less

CL

MT

TF

Diagnostic trouble code

: SFT SOL A/CIRC

: P0750

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.

Check item (Possible cause)

NAAT0060S03

I Harness or connectors

(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

I Shift solenoid valve A

SEF895K

SU

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0060S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

2) Start engine.

3) Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transmission to shift

“1” , “2” (“GEAR”).

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle in D

1

,

D

2 position.

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT911I

PD

AX

AT-169

Description (Cont’d)

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle in D

1

,

D

2 position.

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-170

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A

NAAT0197

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT764A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-171

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.

3. Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.

NAAT0061

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 20 - 40

?

©

GO TO 2.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly.

Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift solenoid valve A

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-173.

I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.

3. Check resistance between terminal 6 and TCM harness connector terminal 11.

SAT330I

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 0

?

©

GO TO 3.

©

Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

SAT541J

AT-172

DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-169.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

GI

MA

EM

LC

Component Inspection

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0062

NAAT0062S01

Resistance Check

I

Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.

Solenoid valve

Shift solenoid valve A 3

Terminal No.

Ground

NAAT0062S0101

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40 Ω

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT654I

Operation Check

NAAT0062S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.

TF

PD

AX

SAT653I

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-173

Description

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

Description

NAAT0063

Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

SAT341H

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

4

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

12 L/R

Shift solenoid valve B

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0063S02

Condition

When shift solenoid valve B operates.

(When driving in “D

1

” or “D

2

”.)

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.

(When driving in “D

3

” or “D

4

”.)

1V or less

Diagnostic trouble code

: SFT SOL B/CIRC

: P0755

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.

Check item (Possible cause)

NAAT0063S03

I Harness or connectors

(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

I Shift solenoid valve B

SEF895K

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0063S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

2) Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transmission to shift

1 , 2 , 3 (“GEAR”).

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle in D

1

,

D

2

,

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

D

3 position.

SAT911I

AT-174

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

Description (Cont’d)

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle in D

1

,

D

2

,

D

3

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

position.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-175

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B

NAAT0198

AT-176

MAT765A

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.

3. Check resistance between terminal 7 and ground.

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0064

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT332I

CL

MT

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 20 - 40

?

©

GO TO 2.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly.

Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift solenoid valve B

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-178.

I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.

3. Check resistance between terminal 7 and TCM harness connector terminal 12.

HA

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 0

?

©

GO TO 3.

©

Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

SAT542J

SC

EL

IDX

AT-177

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-174.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

Component Inspection

SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0065

NAAT0065S01

Resistance Check

I

Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.

Solenoid valve

Shift solenoid valve B 2

Terminal No.

Ground

NAAT0065S0101

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40 Ω

SAT651I

Operation Check

NAAT0065S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.

SAT650I

AT-178

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Description

Description

NAAT0066

I

Throttle position sensor

The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position and sends a signal to the TCM.

I

Throttle position switch

Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed throttle position switch. The wide open position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.

SAT329I

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR

MODE

NAAT0066S02

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item

Throttle position sensor

Condition

Fully-closed throttle

Fully-open throttle

Specification

Approximately 0.5V

Approximately 4V

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

MT

NAAT0066S03

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

16

17

32

OR/W

OR/B

P/B

Closed throttle position switch

(in throttle position switch)

Wide open throttle position switch

(in throttle position switch)

Throttle position sensor

(Power source)

Condition

Judgement standard

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-

NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]

When depressing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-

NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]

Battery voltage

1V or less

When depressing accelerator pedal more than half-way after warming up engine.

Battery voltage

When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.

1V or less

— 4.5 - 5.5V

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

41 P

Throttle position sensor

When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine.

(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)

Fully-closed throttle:

Approximately

0.5V

Fully-open throttle:

Approximately

4V

RS

BT

HA

42 B

Throttle position sensor

(Ground)

— —

SC

EL

IDX

AT-179

Description (Cont’d)

Diagnostic trouble code

: TP SEN/CIRC A/T

: P1705

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.

NAAT0066S04

Check item (Possible cause)

I Harness or connectors

(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

I Throttle position sensor

I Throttle position switch

SAT974H

SAT385J

SEF895K

SAT911I

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0066S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

2) Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following.

Refer to steps 1 and 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-

NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.

Accelerator pedal condition

Fully released

Partially depressed

THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW

Less than 4.7V

0.1 - 4.6V

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Fully depressed

More than

1.9 - 4.6V

OFF ON

If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,

AT-183.

If the check result is OK, go to following step.

3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

4) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least

3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.

VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,

AT-183.

If the check result is OK, go to following step.

5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.

VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more

Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle

Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)

AT-180

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Description (Cont’d)

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 3 seconds.

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 3 seconds.

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-181

Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS

NAAT0199

AT-182

MAT766A

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0067

1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM

Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Refer to EC-70, “DESCRIPTION”.

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 2.

© Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-183

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.

Voltage:

Fully-closed throttle:

Approximately 0.5V

Fully-open throttle:

Approximately 4V

Without CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.

Voltage:

Fully-closed throttle valve:

Approximately 0.5V

Fully-open throttle valve:

Approximately 4V

(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)

SAT076H

SAT513J

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 3.

OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 4.

NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit. (Main harness)

AT-184

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 and 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.

4. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.

Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

MTBL0011

FE

CL

MT

OK

NG

SU

SAT052I

OK or NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

Check the following items:

I Throttle position switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-187.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-185

TF

PD

AX

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)

Without CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.

(after warming up engine)

[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]

MTBL0206

OK

NG

SAT526J

OK or NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

Check the following items:

I Throttle position switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-187.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

5 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-180.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-186

DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Component Inspection

Component Inspection

NAAT0205

THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH

NAAT0205S01

Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position)

NAAT0205S0101

I

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.

[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-

DURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]

SAT694I

Accelerator pedal condition

Released

Depressed

Continuity

Yes

No

I

To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-99, “Basic

Inspection”.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT343IA

Wide Open Throttle Position Switch

I

Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3.

Accelerator pedal condition

Released

Depressed

Continuity

No

Yes

NAAT0205S0102

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-187

Description

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Description

NAAT0068

The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the inhibitor switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled.

SAT341H

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Condition

NAAT0068S02

Judgement standard

20 L/B

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

Diagnostic trouble code

: O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC

: P1760

When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate.

1V or less

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.

NAAT0068S03

Check item (Possible cause)

I Harness or connectors

(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)

I Overrun clutch solenoid valve

SEF895K

SAT911I

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0068S01

CAUTION:

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

TESTING CONDITION:

Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.

2) Start engine.

3) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6MPH) in “D” position (OD “ON”).

4) Release accelerator pedal completely in “D” position (OD

“OFF”).

AT-188

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Description (Cont’d)

With GST

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF” position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).

3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF” position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).

3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.

Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON

BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-189

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV

Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV

NAAT0200

AT-190

MAT767A

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0069

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.

3. Check resistance between terminal 8 and ground.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT334I

CL

MT

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 20 - 40

?

©

GO TO 2.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly.

Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Overrun clutch solenoid valve

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-192.

I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.

3. Check resistance between terminal 8 and TCM harness connector terminal 20.

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

Yes

No

Is resistance approx 0

?

©

GO TO 3.

©

Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

SAT543J

SC

EL

IDX

AT-191

DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-188.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

Component Inspection

OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

NAAT0070

NAAT0070S01

Resistance Check

I

Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.

Solenoid valve

Overrun clutch solenoid valve 4

Terminal No.

Ground

NAAT0070S0101

Resistance (Approx.)

20 - 40 Ω

SAT392JA

Operation Check

NAAT0070S0102

I

Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground.

SAT688I

AT-192

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM

POWER SOURCE)

Description

Description

NAAT0172

The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.

GI

MA

SAT342HA

MT

SAT021J

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR

MODE

NAAT0172S02

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Monitor item Condition

Cold [20°C (68°F)]

"

Hot [80°C (176°F)]

Specification

Approximately 1.5V

"

Approximately 0.5V

TF

PD

AX

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

NAAT0172S03

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

10

19

W/R

W/R

Power source

Power source

Condition

When turning ignition switch to “ON”.

When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.

Same as No. 10

Judgement standard

Battery voltage

1V or less

SU

BR

ST

RS

When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.

Battery voltage

28 R/Y

Power source

(Memory back-up) or

BT

When turning ignition switch to “ON”.

Battery voltage

HA

42 B

Throttle position sensor

(Ground)

— —

SC

47 R

A/T fluid temperature sensor

When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).

When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).

Approximately

1.5V

Approximately

0.5V

EL

IDX

AT-193

FE

CL

EM

LC

EC

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM

POWER SOURCE)

Description (Cont’d)

Diagnostic trouble code

: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN

: 8th judgement flicker

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.

NAAT0172S04

Check item (Possible cause)

I Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

I A/T fluid temperature sensor

SAT974H

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0172S01

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Start engine.

2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH).

SAT385J

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH).

3) Perform self-diagnosis.

Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),

AT-46.

SAT335HB

AT-194

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM

POWER SOURCE)

Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS

Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS

NAAT0201

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT768A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-195

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM

POWER SOURCE)

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0173

1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK

NG

SAT514J

3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 42 and ground.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28

(Main harness)

I Ignition switch and fuse

Refer to EL section (“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”).

2 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.

3. Check resistance between terminals 33 and 35 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].

Yes

No

Is resistance approx. 2.5 k

?

©

GO TO 3.

©

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check the following items:

I A/T fluid temperature sensor

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-198.

I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

AT-196

SAT191IA

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM

POWER SOURCE)

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

With CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.

Voltage:

Cold [20°C (68°F)]

Hot [80°C (176°F)]:

Approximately 1.5V

0.5V

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

SAT076H

MT

Without CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.

Voltage:

Cold [20°C (68°F)]

Hot [80°C (176°F)]:

Approximately 1.5V

0.5V

TF

PD

AX

OK

NG

SU

SAT518J

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following item:

I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)

BR

ST

RS

4 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation Procedure, AT-194.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© I Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

I If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-197

DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM

POWER SOURCE)

Component Inspection

Component Inspection

NAAT0174

A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

NAAT0174S01

I

For removal, refer to AT-262.

I

Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 while changing temperature as shown at left.

Temperature °C (°F)

20 (68)

80 (176)

Resistance

Approximately 2.5 k Ω

Approximately 0.3 k Ω

SAT687I

AT-198

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR

Description

Description

NAAT0071

The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT328I

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal

No.

Wire color Item

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE

Condition

40 W/L

Vehicle speed sensor

When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2

MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.

NAAT0071S02

Judgement standard

Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than

4.5V

EC

FE

CL

MT

Diagnostic trouble code

: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR

: 2nd judgement flicker

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

Check item (Possible cause)

NAAT0071S03

TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.

I Harness or connectors

(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)

I Vehicle speed sensor

TF

PD

AX

SAT974H

SU

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0071S01

CAUTION:

I

Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.

I

If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least

5 seconds before continuing.

After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

2) Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 6

MPH).

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT385J

AT-199

Description (Cont’d)

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR

No Tools

1) Start engine.

2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:

Selector lever in “D” position and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16 MPH).

3) Perform self-diagnosis.

Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),

AT-46.

SAT329H

AT-200

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR

NAAT0202

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT769A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-201

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL.

With CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.

Check the value changes according to driving speed.

NAAT0072

SAT076H

Without CONSULT

1. Start engine.

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.

Yes

No

SAT528J

Does battery voltage vary between less than 1V and more than 4.5V?

© GO TO 2.

©

Check the following items:

I Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor

Refer to EL-81, “Component Parts and Harness Connector Location”.

I Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness)

2 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-199.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-202

CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)

Description

Description

NAAT0207

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.

GI

MA

Diagnostic trouble code

: CONTROL UNIT (RAM)

: CONTROL UNIT (ROM)

EM

LC

SAT574J

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is malfunctioning.

TCM

Check item (Possible cause)

NAAT0207S01

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT974H

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0207S02

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT.

2) Start engine.

3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

SAT385J

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-203

CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK DTC

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT.

2. Touch “ERASE”.

PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.

See previous page.

Yes

No

Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM) or CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?

©

Replace TCM.

©

INSPECTION END

=NAAT0208

AT-204

Diagnostic trouble code

: CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)

CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)

Description

Description

NAAT0215

The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT574J

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC

Malfunction is detected when ...

TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.

TCM

Check item (Possible cause)

NAAT0215S01

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT974H

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION

PROCEDURE

NAAT0215S02

NOTE:

If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-

DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.

With CONSULT

1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT.

2) Start engine.

3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

SAT385J

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-205

CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

1 CHECK DTC

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT.

2. Move selector lever to “R” position.

3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).

4. Touch “ERASE”.

5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds.

PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.

See previous page.

Yes

No

Is the “CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?

©

Replace TCM.

©

INSPECTION END

=NAAT0216

AT-206

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC

Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC

NAAT0203

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

MAT770A

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-207

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)

AT-208

MAT771A

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

MAT772A

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-209

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On

1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On

NAAT0073

SYMPTOM:

O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”.

1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK

NG

SAT514J

3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.

Voltage: Battery voltage

OK or NG

© GO TO 2.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28

(Main harness)

I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-96.

I Ignition switch and fuse

Refer to EL-9, “Schematic”.

2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.

3. Check resistance between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground.

Yes

No

SAT515J

If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.

Is resistance approx. 0

?

© GO TO 3.

© I Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-96.

AT-210

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LAMP CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

2. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position.

3. Check voltage between TCM terminals 13 and ground.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

Yes

No

SAT529J

Does battery voltage exist?

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following items.

I Fuse

I O/D OFF indicator lamp

Refer to EL section (“WARNING LAMPS”).

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF indicator lamp (Main harness)

I Refer to EL-9, “Schematic”.

I Harness for short or open between O/D OFF indicator lamp and TCM

FE

CL

MT

TF

4 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-211

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position

2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N”

Position

=NAAT0074

SYMPTOM:

Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.

Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P”Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.

1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-99.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION

Check for short or open of PNP switch 2-pin connector. Refer to “Components Inspection”, AT-104.

SAT367J

SAT838BB

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

Repair or replace PNP switch.

3 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Check starting system. Refer to SC-6, “System Description”.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-212

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed

3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or

Backward When Pushed

=NAAT0075

SYMPTOM:

Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in “P” position.

1 CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS

Check parking components.

Refer to “Parking Pawl Components”, AT-326.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

SAT133B

MT

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-213

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves

4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves

=NAAT0076

SYMPTOM:

Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.

1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-99.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE

Check control linkage. Refer to AT-265.

SAT367J

SAT032G

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-265.

AT-214

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves (Cont’d)

3 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level again.

GI

MA

OK

NG

© GO TO 4.

© Refill ATF.

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

OK or NG

EM

LC

EC

SAT638A

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SAT171B

SU

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 5.

© 1. Disassemble A/T.

2. Check the following items:

I Forward clutch assembly

I Overrun clutch assembly

I Reverse clutch assembly

5 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-215

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position

5. Large Shock. “N”

“R” Position

SYMPTOM:

=NAAT0077

There is large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position.

1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor circuit?

Yes

No

SAT345HA

Yes or No

©

Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0710, DTC P0745 or DTC P1705”, AT-108, 165

or 183.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

SAT329I

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AT-216

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “D” position. Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.

GI

MA

EM

LC

OK

NG

EC

SAT494G

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

FE

CL

MT

4 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-217

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position

6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R”

Position

=NAAT0078

SYMPTOM:

Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting “R” position.

1 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level again.

SAT638A

OK or NG

OK

NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Refill ATF.

2 CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions.

Refer to AT-345.

OK

OK in “1” position, NG in

“R” position

NG in both “1” and “R” positions

SAT493G

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Oil pump assembly

I Torque converter

I Reverse clutch assembly

I High clutch assembly

© GO TO 6.

AT-218

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position. Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.

GI

MA

EM

LC

OK

NG

EC

SAT494G

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Oil pump assembly

FE

CL

MT

TF

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

PD

AX

SU

BR

SAT171B

ST

OK or NG

OK

NG

© GO TO 5.

© GO TO 6.

5 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-219

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Oil pump assembly

I Torque converter

I Reverse clutch assembly

I High clutch assembly

I Low & reverse brake assembly

I Low one-way clutch

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-220

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position

7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2”

Or “1” Position

=NAAT0079

SYMPTOM:

Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D”, “2” or “1” position.

1 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL

Check A/T fluid level again.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

SAT638A

MT

OK

NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Refill ATF.

2 CHECK STALL TEST

Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position.

Refer to “STALL TEST”, AT-59.

OK or NG

OK

NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

GO TO 6.

OK or NG

SU

BR

SAT493G

ST

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-221

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position.

Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.

OK

NG

SAT494G

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

1. Remove control valve assembly.

Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Oil pump assembly

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT171B

OK or NG

OK

NG

© GO TO 5.

© GO TO 6.

5 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-222

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)

I Line pressure solenoid valve

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Oil pump assembly

I Forward clutch assembly

I Forward one-way clutch

I Low one-way clutch

I Low & reverse brake assembly

I Torque converter

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-223

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

SYMPTOM:

=NAAT0080

Vehicle cannot be started from D

1 on Cruise test — Part 1.

1 CHECK SYMPTOM

Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” OK?

Yes

No

Yes or No

© GO TO 2.

©

Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-218.

2 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?

Yes

No

SAT934FB

Yes or No

©

Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, DTC P0750, DTC P0755 or VEHICLE

SPEED SENSOR. MTR”, AT-113, 172, 177 or 202.

©

GO TO 3.

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

SAT329I

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

© Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AT-224

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

(Cont’d)

4 CHECK LINE PRESSURE

Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in “D” position.

Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.

GI

MA

OK

NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

GO TO 8.

5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

OK or NG

EM

LC

EC

SAT494G

FE

CL

MT

OK or NG

OK

NG

©

GO TO 6.

©

GO TO 8.

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly.

Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve A

I Shift valve B

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 7.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

TF

PD

AX

SAT171B

SU

BR

HA

SC

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-225

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

(Cont’d)

7 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly.

Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve A

I Shift valve B

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Forward clutch assembly

I Forward one-way clutch

I Low one-way clutch

I High clutch assembly

I Torque converter

I Oil pump assembly

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 7.

© Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-226

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

1

→ D

2

Or Does Not Kickdown: D

4

9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

Kickdown: D

SYMPTOM:

4

D

2

1

D

2

Or Does Not

→ D

2

=NAAT0081

A/T does not shift from D

1

A/T does not shift from D

4 to D to D

2

2 at the specified speed.

when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed.

1 CHECK SYMPTOM

Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

” OK?

Yes

No

Yes or No

© GO TO 2.

© Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle

Cannot Be Started From D

1

”, AT-221, 224.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?

CL

MT

TF

PD

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.

©

GO TO 3.

3 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT

Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720 and

VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR”, AT-113, 202.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuits.

SAT367J

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-227

9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

1

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

→ D

2

Or Does Not Kickdown: D

4

→ D

2

(Cont’d)

4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

OK or NG

OK

NG

©

GO TO 6.

©

GO TO 8.

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve A

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 7.

© Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-228

SAT329I

SAT171B

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

1

→ D

2

Or Does Not Kickdown: D

4

→ D

2

(Cont’d)

7 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

GI

MA

EM

LC

8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve A

I Shift solenoid valve A

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Servo piston assembly

I Brake band

I Oil pump assembly

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 7.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

RS

BT

HA

SC

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-229

10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

2

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

→ D

3

10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

SYMPTOM:

2

D

3

A/T does not shift from D

2 to D

3 at the specified speed.

=NAAT0082

1 CHECK SYMPTOM

Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

” OK?

Yes

No

Yes or No

© GO TO 2.

©

Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle

Cannot Be Started From D

1

”, AT-221, 224.

2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.

©

GO TO 3.

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

SAT367J

SAT329I

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 4.

© Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AT-230

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

2

→ D

3

(Cont’d)

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT171B

FE

OK or NG

OK

NG

© GO TO 5.

©

GO TO 7.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve B

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 6.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

6 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-231

10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

2

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

→ D

3

(Cont’d)

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve B

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Servo piston assembly

I High clutch assembly

I Oil pump assembly

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 6.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-232

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

→ D

4

11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

D

4

=NAAT0083

SYMPTOM:

I

A/T does not shift from D

3 to D

4

I

A/T must be warm before D

3 to D at the specified speed.

4 shift will occur.

1 CHECK SYMPTOM

Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

” OK?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

GO TO 2.

©

Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle

Cannot Be Started From D

1

”, AT-221, 224.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

2 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

With CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits?

I Inhibitor switch

I Overdrive control switch

I A/T fluid temperature sensor

I Revolution sensor

I Shift solenoid valve A or B

I Vehicle speed sensor

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

TF

PD

AX

SAT363HA

Yes or No

©

Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705, P0710, P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL

SPEED SEN·MTR”, AT-102, 108, 113, 172, 177 or 202.

©

GO TO 3.

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-233

11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

→ D

4

(Cont’d)

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

OK or NG

OK

NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

GO TO 7.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve B

I Overrun clutch control valve

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 6.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-234

SAT329I

SAT171B

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

11. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

→ D

4

(Cont’d)

6 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

GI

MA

EM

LC

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Shift valve B

I Overrun clutch control valve

I Shift solenoid valve B

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Servo piston assembly

I Brake band

I Torque converter

I Oil pump assembly

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 6.

© Repair or replace damaged parts.

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-235

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up

12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up

SYMPTOM:

A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.

1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?

=NAAT0084

Yes

No

SAT346H

Yes or No

©

Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P0740”, AT-151.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

SAT329I

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 3.

©

Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check following items:

I Torque converter clutch control valve

I Torque converter relief valve

I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 4.

© Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-236

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-237

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition

13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition

=NAAT0085

SYMPTOM:

A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.

1 CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to “DTC P0725”, AT-118.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT347H

SAT171B

OK or NG

OK

NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

GO TO 5.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Torque converter clutch control valve

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-238

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

GI

MA

EM

LC

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Torque converter clutch control valve

I Pilot valve

I Pilot filter

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 4.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-239

14. Lock-up Is Not Released

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

14. Lock-up Is Not Released

=NAAT0086

SYMPTOM:

Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.

1 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?

SAT367J

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P1705”, AT-183.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-240

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D

4

→ D

3

)

15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle

(Light Braking D

4

D

3

)

=NAAT0087

SYMPTOM:

I

Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D

4 to D

3

.

I

Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning overdrive control switch OFF.

I

Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting

A/T from “D” to “2” position.

1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P1760”, AT-191.

©

GO TO 2.

2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

© Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

SAT348H

SU

BR

ST

SAT329I

RS

BT

TF

PD

AX

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-241

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D

4

→ D

3

) (Cont’d)

3 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION

1. Remove oil pan.

2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT171B

OK or NG

OK

NG

© GO TO 4.

©

GO TO 6.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Overrun clutch control valve

I Overrun clutch reducing valve

I Overrun clutch solenoid valve

OK

NG

OK or NG

© GO TO 5.

© Repair or replace damaged parts.

5 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM

1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.

2. Check the following items:

I Overrun clutch control valve

I Overrun clutch reducing valve

I Overrun clutch solenoid valve

3. Disassemble A/T.

4. Check the following items:

I Overrun clutch assembly

I Oil pump assembly

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-242

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D

1

16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D

1

SYMPTOM:

Vehicle does not start from D

1 on Cruise test — Part 2.

NAAT0088

1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL SPEED

SEN·MTR”, AT-113, 172, 177 or 202.

©

GO TO 2.

SAT633I

CL

MT

2 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

Go to “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D

1

”, AT-224.

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

HA

SC

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-243

17. A/T Does Not Shift: D

4

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

→ D

3

, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”

17. A/T Does Not Shift: D

4

D

3

, When

Overdrive Control Switch “ON”

“OFF”

SYMPTOM:

A/T does not shift from D

4 to D control switch to “OFF” position.

3

=NAAT0089

when changing overdrive

1 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-248.

©

Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D

2

,

D

3

”, AT-230.

SAT344H

AT-244

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

18. A/T Does Not Shift: D

3

→ 2

2

, When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position

18. A/T Does Not Shift: D

Lever “D”

“2” Position

3

2

2

, When Selector

=NAAT0090

SYMPTOM:

A/T does not shift from D

3 from “D” to “2” position.

to 2

2 when changing selector lever

1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT367J

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.

©

Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D

Or Does Not Kickdown: D

4

1

,

D

2

,

D

2

”, AT-227.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-245

19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2

2

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

→ 1

1

, When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position

19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2

Lever “2”

“1” Position

2

1

1

, When Selector

=NAAT0091

SYMPTOM:

A/T does not shift from 2

2 from “2” to “1” position.

to 1

1 when changing selector lever

1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Without CONSULT

Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?

Yes

No

2 CHECK SYMPTOM

Check again.

Yes or No

©

Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.

©

GO TO 2.

SAT367J

OK

NG

SAT778B

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-246

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake

20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine

Brake

SYMPTOM:

NAAT0092

Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 2

2

(1

2

) to 1

1

.

1 CHECK SYMPTOM

Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” OK?

Yes

No

Yes or No

©

Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D

4

©

Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-218.

,

D

3

)”, AT-241.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT516J

SAT341I

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,

Overdrive Control and Throttle Position

Switches Circuit Checks)

NAAT0204

SYMPTOM:

O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even the lamp circuit is good.

DESCRIPTION

NAAT0204S01

I PNP switch

The PNP switch assemble includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the TCM.

I

Overdrive control switch

Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and sends a signal to the TCM.

I

Throttle position switch

Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed throttle position switch.

The wide open throttle position switch sends a signal to the

TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT329I

AT-247

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

=NAAT0204S03

NOTE:

The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive control and throttle position switch circuits.

1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly.

OK

NG

SAT761I

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

Check the following items:

I PNP switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-253.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)

AT-248

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)

Without CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each position.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

MTBL0205

FE

CL

MT

Yes

No

SAT517J

Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?

© GO TO 3.

©

Check the following items:

I PNP switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-253.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-249

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

3 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SWITCH”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.

(Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT means overdrive “OFF”.)

Without CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 22 and ground when overdrive control switch is “ON” and “OFF”.

Voltage:

Switch position “ON”:

Battery voltage

Switch position “OFF”:

1V or less

SAT076H

SAT531J

OK or NG

OK (With CONSULT)

©

GO TO 4.

OK (Without CONSULT)

©

GO TO 5.

NG

©

Check the following items:

I Overdrive control switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-253.

I Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness)

AT-250

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)

With CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.

3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 and 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-

DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.

4. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.

Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

MTBL0011

FE

CL

MT

OK

NG

SU

SAT052I

OK or NG

©

GO TO 6.

©

Check the following items:

I Throttle position switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-254.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-251

TF

PD

AX

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)

Without CONSULT

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.

(after warming up engine)

[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]

MTBL0206

OK

NG

SAT526J

OK or NG

©

GO TO 6.

©

Check the following items:

I Throttle position switch

Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-254.

I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)

I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

6 CHECK DTC

Perform Diagnostic procedure, AT-248.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.

2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.

AT-252

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

COMPONENT INSPECTION

Overdrive Control Switch

I

Check continuity between two terminals.

Continuity:

Switch position “ON”:

No

Switch position “OFF”:

Yes

NAAT0204S04

NAAT0204S0401

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT342I

SAT517GB

Park/Neutral Position Switch

NAAT0204S0402

1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through each position.

Terminal No.

Lever position

P

R

N

D

2

1

1 - 2

3 - 5

1 - 2

3 - 7

3 - 8

3 - 9

3 - 4

3 - 6

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SAT843BG

SU

2. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.

3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-265.

BR

ST

RS

SAT807B

BT

4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.

5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-265.

6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT386HC

AT-253

TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

Throttle Position Switch

NAAT0204S0403

Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle Position)

I

Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.

[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-

DURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]

Accelerator pedal condition

Released

Depressed

Continuity

Yes

No

SAT694I

I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-99, “Basic

Inspection”.

Wide Open Throttle Position Switch

I

Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3.

Accelerator pedal condition

Released

Depressed

Continuity

No

Yes

SAT343IA

SAT251JA

A/T Fluid Temperature Switch

NAAT0204S0404

1. Make sure the A/T fluid warning lamp lights when the key is inserted and turned to “ON”.

2. Make sure the A/T fluid warning lamp goes off when turning the ignition switch to “ON”.

3. Check resistance between terminal 10 and ground while changing temperature as shown at left.

Temperature °C (°F)

140 (284) or more

140 (284) or less

Resistance

Yes

No

AT-254

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Description

Description

NAAT0093

I

The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:

With the key switch turned to “ON”, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed.

With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.

The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.

I

The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SU

BR

SAT138JA

ST

RS

BT

TF

PD

AX

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-255

Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —

NAAT0094

AT-256

MAT773A

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure

NAAT0095

SYMPTOM 1:

I

Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in “ON” position and brake pedal applied.

I

Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in

“ON” position and brake pedal released.

I

Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.

SYMPTOM 2:

Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to

“P” position. It can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”.

1 CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Check key interlock cable for damage.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 2.

©

Repair key interlock cable. Refer to “Key Interlock Cable”, AT-260.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

2 CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION

Check selector lever position for damage.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 3.

©

Check selector lever. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE — Inhibitor Switch and Manual

Control Linkage Adjustment”, AT-265 and AT-265.

TF

PD

3 CHECK POWER SOURCE

1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

2. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch harness terminal 1 and ground.

AX

SU

BR

Yes

No

ST

RS

SAT917HJ

Does battery voltage exist?

©

GO TO 4.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between battery and ASCD brake switch harness terminal 1

I Fuse

I Ignition switch (Refer to EL section.)

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-257

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (BRAKE SWITCH)

Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.

(Do not start engine.)

I Check voltage between A/T device harness terminal 5 and ground.

Voltage:

Brake pedal depressed:

0V

Brake pedal released:

Battery voltage

OK

NG

SAT346IA

OK or NG

©

GO TO 5.

©

Check the following items:

I Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector 5 and ASCD brake switch harness connector 2

I ASCD brake switch

(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-259.)

5 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.

2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.

3. Check continuity between A/T device harness terminal 6 and ground.

SAT347I

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 6.

©

Repair harness or connector.

6 CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH

(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-259.)

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 7.

©

Replace park position switch.

AT-258

A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM

7 CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-259.)

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

GO TO 8.

©

Replace shift lock solenoid.

8 CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION

1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)

3. Recheck shift lock operation.

OK

NG

OK or NG

©

INSPECTION END

©

1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test.

2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection.

Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

Component Check

NAAT0096

SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID

NAAT0096S01

I

Check operation by applying battery voltage between shift lock solenoid harness connector terminal 2 and A/T device harness connector terminal 5.

TF

PD

AX

SAT357IA

SU

PARK POSITION SWITCH

NAAT0096S02

I heck continuity between park position switch harness connector terminal 2 and A/T device harness connector terminal 6.

Continuity Condition

When selector lever is set in “P” position and selector lever button is released

Except above

Yes

No

BR

ST

RS

SAT358I

BT

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

NAAT0096S03

I

Check continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2.

Condition

When brake pedal is depressed

When brake pedal is released

Continuity

No

Yes

HA

SC

EL

Check ASCD brake switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-14, “Removal and Installation”.

IDX

SAT922HM

AT-259

Components

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Components

NAAT0097

SAT352I

CAUTION:

I

Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts.

I

After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.

Removal

NAAT0098

Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable.

SAT353I

AT-260

KEY INTERLOCK CABLE

Installation

Installation

NAAT0099

1. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install lock plate.

2. Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with band.

3. Set selector lever to P position.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT354I

4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT355I

5. Install casing cap to bracket.

6. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.

SAT356I

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-261

Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators

REMOVAL

1. Remove exhaust front tube.

2. Remove oil pan and gasket and drain ATF.

NAAT0100

NAAT0100S01

SAT359I

3. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor if necessary.

4. Remove oil strainer.

SAT073BA

5. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts and disconnecting harness connector.

Bolt length and location

Bolt symbol

A

B

 mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

6. Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary.

7. Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary.

SAT353B

8. Remove accumulator

A, B, C

and

D

by applying compressed air if necessary.

I

Hold each piston with rag.

9. Reinstall any part removed.

I

Always use new sealing parts.

SAT074BA

AT-262

SAT360IA

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Revolution Sensor Replacement

Revolution Sensor Replacement

NAAT0210

— 4WD MODEL —

NAAT0210S01

1. Remove rear engine mounting member from side member while supporting A/T with transfer case with jack. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to

EM-44, “Rear Engine Mounting”.

2. Lower A/T with transfer case as much as possible.

3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T.

4. Reinstall any part removed.

I

Always use new sealing parts.

— 2WD MODEL —

I

Remove revolution sensor from A/T.

I

Always use new sealing parts.

NAAT0210S02

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT661I

Rear Oil Seal Replacement

NAAT0211

— 4WD MODEL —

NAAT0211S01

1. Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-9, “Removal”.

2. Remove rear oil seal.

I

Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.

3. Install rear oil seal.

I

Apply ATF before installing.

4. Reinstall any part removed.

TF

PD

AX

SAT035E

SAT544J

SAT546J

SU

Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal

Replacement

NAAT0212

— 2WD MODEL —

NAAT0212S01

NOTE:

Replace rear extension assembly as a single unit because it cannot be disassembled.

1. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.

2. Remove exhaust mounting and mounting bracket.

3. Disconnect revolution and speedometer sensor harness connector.

4. Support A/T assembly with a jack.

5. Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44,

“Rear Engine Mounting”.

6. Remove rear extension assembly.

a. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.

CAUTION:

Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.

7. Reinstall any part removed.

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-263

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal Replacement (Cont’d)

I

Always use new sealing parts.

Parking Components Inspection

NAAT0213

— 4WD MODEL —

1. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.

NAAT0213S01

2. Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-9, “Removal”.

3. Remove A/T control cable bracket from transmission case.

SAT083J

4. Support A/T assembly with a jack.

5. Remove adapter case from transmission case.

6. Replace parking components if necessary.

7. Reinstall any part removed.

I

Always use new sealing parts.

SAT078B

— 2WD MODEL —

NAAT0213S02

1. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.

2. Support A/T assembly with a jack.

3. Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44,

“Rear Engine Mounting”.

SAT551J

4. Remove rear extension assembly.

a. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.

CAUTION:

Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.

5. Replace parking components if necessary.

6. Reinstall any part removed.

I

Always use new sealing parts.

SAT546J

AT-264

SAT081B

ON-VEHICLE SERVICE

Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment

Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment

NAAT0104

1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly.

2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in “N” position.

3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts.

4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible.

5. Reinstall any part removed.

6. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to “Components

Inspection”, AT-104.

Manual Control Linkage Adjustment

NAAT0105

Move selector lever from “P” position to “1” position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position.

If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the linkage needs adjustment.

1. Place selector lever in “P” position.

2. Loosen lock nuts.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT361I

3. Tighten turn buckle until aligns with inner cable, pulling selector lever toward “R” position side without pushing button.

4. Back off turn buckle 1 turn and tighten lock nuts to the specified torque.

Lock nut:

: 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)

5. Move selector lever from “P” position to “1” position. Make sure that selector lever can move smoothly.

TF

PD

AX

SAT032G

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

AT-265

Removal

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal

NAAT0214

SAT362IA

CAUTION:

When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from the A/T assembly upper side.

Be careful not to damage sensor edge.

— 4WD MODEL —

NAAT0214S01

1. Remove battery negative terminal.

2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.

3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.

4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.

5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.

6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.

7. Remove transfer control linkage from transfer. Refer to TF-9,

“Removal”.

I

Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft.

I

Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil seal.

8. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.

9. Disconnect A/T and speedometer sensor harness connectors.

SAT532JA

10. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-10, “Removal and Installation”.

11. Remove gusset and rear plate cover securing engine to A/T assembly.

12. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.

I

Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.

SAT800C

AT-266

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Removal (Cont’d)

13. Support A/T and transfer assembly with a jack.

14. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T assembly. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44, “Rear Engine Mounting”.

15. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.

I

Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.

I

Secure A/T assembly to a jack.

16. Lower A/T assembly with transfer.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT801C

SAT553J

— 2WD MODEL —

NAAT0214S02

CAUTION:

I

Do not attach lifting cable to or place supporting fixture under companion flange at rear of A/T (shown in the figure at left) when lifting/lowering A/T.

I

Be sure to attach lifting cable to rear engine mounting or dynamic damper location when lifting/lowering A/T.

1. Remove battery negative terminal.

2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.

3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.

4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.

5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.

6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.

7. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.

8. Disconnect A/T and speedometer sensor harness connectors.

9. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-10, “Removal and Installation”.

10. Remove gusset and rear plate cover securing engine to A/T assembly.

11. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.

I

Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.

12. Support A/T assembly with a jack.

13. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T assembly. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44, “Rear Engine Mounting”.

14. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.

15. Pull A/T assembly backwards.

I

Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.

I

Secure A/T assembly to a jack.

16. Lower A/T assembly.

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT544J

BT

Installation

I

Drive plate runout

Maximum allowable runout:

NAAT0107

Refer to EM-54, “FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT”.

If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring gear.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT977H

AT-267

Installation (Cont’d)

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

I When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.

Distance “A”:

26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more

SAT017B

I Install converter to drive plate.

I

After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates freely without binding.

SAT006G

SAT553H

I

Tighten bolts securing transmission.

Bolt No.

1

2

3

Gusset to engine

Tightening torque

N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)

39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)

29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29)

29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29)

Bolt length “” mm (in)

47.5 (1.870)

58.0 (2.283)

25.0 (0.984)

20.0 (0.787)

I

Reinstall any part removed.

I

Check fluid level in transmission.

I

Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transmission operates correctly.

With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through “N” to “D”, to “2”, to “1” and to “R” positions.

A slight shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transmission is shifted.

I

Perform road test. Refer to “ROAD TEST”, AT-63.

SAT638A

AT-268

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

AIR BREATHER HOSE

Installation (Cont’d)

NAAT0107S01

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

SAT572J

AX

SU

BR

HA

SC

SAT573J

EL

IDX

ST

RS

BT

AT-269

Components

OVERHAUL

Components

NAAT0108

AT-270

SAT147JA

OVERHAUL

Components (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

RS

BT

HA

SC

SAT752IB

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-271

Components (Cont’d)

OVERHAUL

AT-272

SAT552J

OVERHAUL

Oil Channel

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

SAT185B

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

Oil Channel

NAAT0109

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT-273

OVERHAUL

Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings

Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings

NAAT0110

AT-274

SAT140J

NAAT0111

DISASSEMBLY

1. Drain ATF through drain plug.

2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while pulling straight out.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT018B

3. Check torque converter one-way clutch.

a. Insert Tool into spline of one-way clutch inner race.

b. Hook bearing support unitized with one-way clutch outer race with suitable wire.

c. Check that one-way clutch inner race rotates only clockwise with Tool while holding bearing support with wire.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT521G

4. Remove PNP switch from transmission case.

TF

PD

AX

SAT021BB

SU

5. Remove oil pan.

I

Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles inside will not move.

BR

ST

RS

SAT754I

BT

6. Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT522G

AT-275

DISASSEMBLY

7. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.

I

If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/T. Refer to LC-12, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLA-

TION”.

SAT171B

8. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid temperature sensor connectors.

I

Be careful not to damage connector.

SAT024BC

9. Remove oil strainer.

a. Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly.

Then remove O-ring from oil strainer.

SAT008B b. Check oil strainer screen for damage.

SAT025B

10. Remove control valve assembly.

a. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords then remove terminal clips.

SAT009B

AT-276

DISASSEMBLY

b. Remove bolts A and B, and remove control valve assembly from transmission.

Bolt symbol

A

B

Length mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT353B c. Remove solenoid connector.

I

Be careful not to damage connector.

SAT026B d. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

RS

SAT127B

BT

11. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while pushing on stopper.

I

Be careful not to damage cord.

I

Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is damaged.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT128B

AT-277

DISASSEMBLY

12. Remove converter housing from transmission case.

I

Be careful not to scratch converter housing.

SAT999A

13. Remove O-ring from input shaft.

SAT995A

14. Remove oil pump assembly.

a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from transmission case.

SAT027B b. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.

c. Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing.

I

Be careful not to scratch pump housing.

SAT028B d. Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump assembly.

SAT108B

AT-278

DISASSEMBLY

15. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT988A

16. Remove brake band and band strut.

a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from transmission case.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT029B b. Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case.

TF

PD

AX

SAT986A c. Hold brake band in a circular shape with clip.

RS

SAT655

BT

17. Remove front side clutch and gear components.

a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun gear) from transmission case.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT030B

AT-279

SU

BR

ST

DISASSEMBLY

b. Remove front bearing race from clutch pack.

c. Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack.

SAT113B d. Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case.

SAT031B e. Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier.

f.

Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier.

SAT968A g. Remove rear sun gear from transmission case.

SAT974A

18. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD model only).

a. Remove rear extension assembly.

b. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.

CAUTION:

Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.

c. Remove rear extension gasket.

SAT546J

AT-280

DISASSEMBLY

19. Remove adapter case (4WD model only).

a. Remove adapter case from transmission case.

b. Remove adapter case gasket from transmission case.

SAT755I c. Remove oil seal from adapter case.

I

Be careful not to scratch adapter case.

I

Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.

MT

SAT756I

20. Remove revolution sensor from rear extension or adapter case.

a. Remove O-ring from revolution sensor.

TF

PD

AX

SAT556J

21. Remove output shaft and parking gear (4WD model only).

a. Remove rear snap ring from output shaft.

FE

CL

SU

BR

ST

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT960A b. Slowly push output shaft all the way forward.

I

Do not use excessive force.

c. Remove snap ring from output shaft.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT957A

AT-281

DISASSEMBLY

d. Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmission case.

e. Remove parking gear from output shaft.

SAT109B f.

Remove needle bearing from transmission case.

SAT033B

22. Remove rear side clutch and gear components.

a. Remove front internal gear.

SAT954A b. Remove bearing race from front internal gear.

SAT110B c. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.

SAT111B

AT-282

DISASSEMBLY

d. Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a set from transmission case.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT951A e. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub.

f.

Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and forward clutch hub.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT148G g. Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub.

TF

PD

AX

SAT036B h. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.

SAT037B

23. Remove band servo and accumulator components.

a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case.

RS

BT

HA

SC

SU

BR

ST

EL

IDX

SAT038B

AT-283

DISASSEMBLY

b. Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes out of transmission case.

I

Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.

c. Remove return springs.

SAT039B d. Remove springs from accumulator pistons B, C and D.

e. Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out.

I

Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.

Identification of accumulator pistons

Identification of oil holes

A a

B b

C c

D d

SAT040BA f.

Remove O-ring from each piston.

SAT523GA

24. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary.

a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmission case) and remove lock nut from shaft.

SAT041B b. Remove retaining pin from transmission case.

SAT042B

AT-284

DISASSEMBLY

c. While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and parking rod from transmission case.

GI

MA

SAT935A d. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

SAT043B e. Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case.

SAT934A f.

Remove oil seal from transmission case.

SAT044B

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-285

Oil Pump

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Oil Pump

COMPONENTS

NAAT0112

SAT648AB

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0113

1. Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover.

SAT649A

2. Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes.

I

Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of foreaft direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove rotor.

SAT650A

3. While pushing on cam ring remove pivot pin.

I

Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SAT651A

AT-286

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Oil Pump (Cont’d)

4. While holding cam ring and spring lift out cam ring spring.

I

Be careful not to damage oil pump housing.

I

Hold cam ring spring to prevent it from jumping.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT652A

5. Remove cam ring and cam ring spring from oil pump housing.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT653A

6. Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control piston assembly.

TF

PD

AX

SAT654A

7. Remove oil seal from oil pump housing.

I

Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT655A

BT

INSPECTION

NAAT0114

Oil Pump Cover, Rotor, Vanes, Control Piston, Side

Seals, Cam Ring and Friction Ring

I

Check for wear or damage.

NAAT0114S01

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT656A

AT-287

Oil Pump (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

SAT657A

Side Clearances

NAAT0114S02

I

Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing and cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston. Measure in at least four places along their circumferences. Maximum measured values should be within specified positions.

I

Before measurement, check that friction rings, O-ring, control piston side seals and cam ring spring are removed.

Standard clearance (Cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston):

Refer to SDS, AT-349.

I

If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly except oil pump cover assembly.

Seal Ring Clearance

I

Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.

NAAT0114S03

Standard clearance:

0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)

Wear limit:

0.25 mm (0.0098 in)

I

If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.

SAT658A

ASSEMBLY

1. Drive oil seal into oil pump housing.

I

Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface.

NAAT0115

SAT081E

2. Install cam ring in oil pump housing by the following a. Install side seal on control piston.

I

Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes toward control piston.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to side seal.

b. Install control piston on oil pump.

SAT654A c. Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

SAT660A

AT-288

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Oil Pump (Cont’d) d. Assemble cam ring, cam ring spring and spring seat. Install spring by pushing it against pump housing.

GI

MA

SAT661A e. While pushing on cam ring install pivot pin.

SAT651A

3. Install rotor, vanes and vane rings.

I

Pay attention to direction of rotor.

TF

PD

AX

SAT662A

SU

4. Install oil pump housing and oil pump cover.

a. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly in oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape.

b. Tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern.

BR

ST

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

SAT649A

SAT663A

BT

5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly to a close fit.

I

Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit carefully in each groove.

Small dia. seal ring:

No mark

Large dia. seal ring:

Yellow mark in area shown by arrow

I

Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. It may deform ring.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-289

Control Valve Assembly

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Assembly

COMPONENTS

NAAT0116

AT-290

SAT534J

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0117

1. Remove solenoids.

a. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plate from lower body.

b. Remove O-ring from solenoid.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT194B c. Remove line pressure solenoid valve from upper body.

d. Remove O-ring from solenoid.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT667A e. Remove 3-unit solenoid assembly from upper body.

f.

Remove O-rings from solenoids.

TF

PD

AX

SAT043G

SU

2. Disassemble upper and lower bodies.

a. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts, reamer bolts and support plates.

b. Remove lower body, separator plate as a unit from upper body.

I

Be careful not to drop pilot filter, orifice check valve, spring and steel balls.

BR

ST

RS

SAT195B

BT

c. Place lower body facedown, and remove separator plate.

d. Remove pilot filter, orifice check valve and orifice check spring.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT670A

AT-291

Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

e. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body. Then remove them from upper body.

SAT671A

INSPECTION

NAAT0118

Lower and Upper Bodies

NAAT0118S01

I

Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower body.

SAT672A

I

Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper body.

I

Be careful not to lose these parts.

SAT673A

I

Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from damage.

I

Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage.

SAT674A

Separator Plate

NAAT0118S02

I

Make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not deformed and oil holes are clean.

SAT675A

AT-292

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)

Pilot Filter

NAAT0118S03

I

Check to make sure that filter is not clogged or damaged.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT676A

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve

NAAT0118S04

I

Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.

I

Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.

Line Pressure Solenoid Valve

NAAT0118S05

I

Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.

I

Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT149G

3-Unit Solenoid Assembly (Overrun Clutch Solenoid

Valve and Shift Solenoid Valves A and B)

NAAT0118S06

I

Measure resistance of each solenoid. Refer to “Component

Inspection”, AT-147.

TF

PD

AX

SAT095B

SU

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and Switch

NAAT0118S07

I

Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-109

and AT-254.

BR

ST

RS

SAT096BA

BT

ASSEMBLY

NAAT0119

1. Install upper and lower bodies.

a. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their proper positions.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT671A

AT-293

Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body.

SAT681A c. Place oil circuit of lower body face up. Install orifice check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.

SAT682A d. Install lower separator plate on lower body.

e. Install and temporarily tighten support plates, A/T fluid temperature sensor and tube brackets.

SAT197B f.

Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer bolt as a guide.

I

Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.

SAT198B

AT-294

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d) g. Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their proper locations.

Bolt length and location:

Bolt symbol

Bolt length mm (in) a

70 (2.76) b

50 (1.97) c

33 (1.30) d

27 (1.06)

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT199BA

2. Install solenoids.

a. Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plates onto lower body.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT200B b. Attach O-rings and install 3-unit solenoids assembly onto upper body.

c. Attach O-ring and install line pressure solenoid valve onto upper body.

3. Tighten all bolts.

TF

PD

AX

SAT150G

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-295

Control Valve Upper Body

COMPONENTS

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Upper Body

NAAT0120

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.

Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-346.

AT-296

SAT142JA

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)

DISASSEMBLY

1. Remove valves at parallel pins.

I

Do not use a magnetic hand.

NAAT0121

GI

MA

SAT834A a. Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins.

FE

CL

MT

SAT822A b. Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs and sleeves.

I

Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out.

TF

PD

AX

EM

LC

EC

SAT823A

SU

c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts.

I

If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body facedown and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.

I

Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.

BR

ST

RS

BT

SAT824A

2. Remove valves at retainer plates.

a. Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT825A

AT-297

Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring.

SAT826A c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts.

I

If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a soft hammer.

I

Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc.

SAT827A

I

4-2 sequence valve and relay valve are located far back in upper body. If they are hard to remove, carefully push them out using stiff wire.

I

Be careful not to scratch sliding surface of valve with wire.

SAT828A

SAT829A

INSPECTION

NAAT0122

Valve Springs

NAAT0122S01

I

Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.

Also check for damage or deformation.

Inspection standard:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

I

Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.

Control Valves

I

Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.

NAAT0122S02

ASSEMBLY

NAAT0123

1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.

I

Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.

SAT830A

AT-298

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)

I Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into proper position.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT831A

Pressure regulator valve

I

If pressure regulator plug is not centered properly, sleeve cannot be inserted into bore in upper body. If this happens, use vinyl tape wrapped screwdriver to center sleeve until it can be inserted.

I

Turn sleeve slightly while installing.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT832A

Accumulator control plug

I

Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in plug.

I

Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install accumulator control valve.

TF

PD

AX

SAT833A

2. Install parallel pins and retainer plates.

SU

BR

ST

SAT834A

I

While pushing plug, install parallel pin.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT823A

AT-299

Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

4-2 sequence valve and relay valve

I

Push 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve with wire wrapped in vinyl tape to prevent scratching valve body. Install parallel pins.

SAT835A

I Insert retainer plate while pushing spring.

SAT836A

AT-300

COMPONENTS

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Control Valve Lower Body

Control Valve Lower Body

GI

NAAT0124

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.

Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-346.

AT-301

RS

BT

HA

SAT966I

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0125

1. Remove valves at parallel pins.

2. Remove valves at retainer plates.

For removal procedures, refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Control

Valve Upper Body.

SAT838A

SAT829A

INSPECTION

NAAT0126

Valve Springs

NAAT0126S01

I

Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter.

Inspection standard:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

I

Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.

Control Valves

NAAT0126S02

I

Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage.

ASSEMBLY

NAAT0127

I

Install control valves.

For installation procedures, refer to “ASSEMBLY” of Control

Valve Upper Body, AT-298.

SAT838A

AT-302

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Reverse Clutch

COMPONENTS

Reverse Clutch

GI

NAAT0128

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SAT841A

SAT143J

SU

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0129

1. Check operation of reverse clutch.

a. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.

Apply compressed air to oil hole.

b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.

c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,

I

D-ring might be damaged.

I Oil seal might be damaged.

I

Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.

BR

ST

RS

BT

2. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, dish plate and snap ring.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT842A

AT-303

Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch springs.

I

Do not expand snap ring excessively.

4. Remove spring retainer and return spring.

SAT524G

5. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole until piston is removed.

I

Do not apply compressed air abruptly.

6. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.

SAT844A

INSPECTION

Reverse Clutch Snap Ring and Spring Retainer

I

Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.

NAAT0130

NAAT0130S01

Reverse Clutch Return Springs

NAAT0130S02

I

Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and outside diameter.

Inspection standard:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

SAT829A

SAT845A

Reverse Clutch Drive Plates

I

Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.

I Measure thickness of facing.

Thickness of drive plate:

NAAT0130S03

Standard value: 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)

Wear limit: 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

I

If not within wear limit, replace.

Reverse Clutch Dish Plate

I

Check for deformation or damage.

NAAT0130S04

AT-304

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)

Reverse Clutch Piston

NAAT0130S05

I

Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized.

I

Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.

I

Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to assure that air leaks past ball.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT846A

ASSEMBLY

1. Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.

I

Apply ATF to both parts.

NAAT0131

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT847A

2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly.

I

Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.

SAT848A

3. Install return springs and spring retainer.

SAT849A

4. Install snap ring while compressing clutch springs.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

SAT524G

AT-305

Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

I

Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.

SAT850A

5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate.

6. Install snap ring.

SAT842A

7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.

Specified clearance:

Standard

0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in)

Allowable limit

1.2 mm (0.047 in)

Retaining plate:

Refer to SDS, AT-347.

SAT852A

8. Check operation of reverse clutch.

Refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Reverse Clutch, AT-303.

SAT841A

AT-306

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

High Clutch

COMPONENTS

TF

SAT144J

PD

AX

SU

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

NAAT0133

Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as those for reverse clutch, with the following exception:

BR

ST

RS

BT

SAT853A

I

Check of high clutch operation

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT854A

AT-307

High Clutch

GI

NAAT0132

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

High Clutch (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

I Removal and installation of return spring

SAT525G

I Inspection of high clutch return springs

Inspection standard:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

SAT829A

I

Inspection of high clutch drive plate

Thickness of drive plate:

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)

Wear limit

1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

SAT845A

I

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring

Specified clearance:

Standard

1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in)

Allowable limit

2.8 mm (0.110 in)

Retaining plate:

Refer to SDS, AT-347.

SAT858A

AT-308

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Forward and Overrun Clutches

Forward and Overrun Clutches

COMPONENTS

NAAT0134

GI

MA

FE

CL

MT

EM

LC

EC

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

SAT557J

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-309

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

NAAT0135

Forward and overrun clutches are serviced essentially the same way as reverse clutch is serviced. However, note the following exceptions.

I

Check of forward clutch operation

SAT860A

I Check of overrun clutch operation

SAT861A

I

Removal of forward clutch drum

Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by holding snap ring.

SAT865A

I

Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons a) While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole.

SAT862A b) Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch.

SAT863A

AT-310

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)

I Removal and installation of return springs

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT526G

I Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs

Inspection standard:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT829A

I

Inspection of forward clutch drive plates

Thickness of drive plate:

Standard

1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)

Wear limit

1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

TF

PD

AX

SAT845A

I

Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates

Thickness of drive plate:

Standard

1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)

Wear limit

1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT845A

BT

I

Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston a) Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly.

I

Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT866A

AT-311

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)

I

Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward clutch drum.

SAT867A b) Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly.

I

Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.

SAT868A

I

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of overrun clutch

Specified clearance:

Standard

1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)

Allowable limit

2.0 mm (0.079 in)

Retaining plate:

Refer to SDS, AT-348.

SAT869A

I

Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of forward clutch

Specified clearance:

Standard

0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in)

Allowable limit

1.85 mm (0.0728 in)

Retaining plate:

Refer to SDS, AT-348.

SAT870A

AT-312

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Low & Reverse Brake

COMPONENTS

Low & Reverse Brake

GI

NAAT0136

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

SAT146JA

PD

AX

SAT872A

SU

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0137

1. Check operation of low and reverse brake.

a. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.

Apply compressed air to oil hole.

b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.

c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,

I

D-ring might be damaged.

I Oil seal might be damaged.

I

Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.

BR

ST

RS

BT

2. Remove snap ring, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT873A

AT-313

Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

3. Remove low one-way clutch inner race, spring retainer and return spring from transmission case.

4. Remove seal rings from low one-way clutch inner race.

5. Remove needle bearing from low one-way clutch inner race.

SAT382I

6. Remove low and reverse brake piston using compressed air.

7. Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston.

SAT876A

INSPECTION

NAAT0138

Low and Reverse Brake Snap Ring and Spring Retainer

NAAT0138S01

I

Check for deformation, or damage.

Low and Reverse Brake Return Springs

NAAT0138S02

I

Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and outside diameter.

Inspection standard:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

SAT829A

SAT845A

Low and Reverse Brake Drive Plates

I

Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.

I Measure thickness of facing.

Thickness of drive plate:

Standard value

1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)

Wear limit

1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

I

If not within wear limit, replace.

AT-314

NAAT0138S03

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)

Low One-way Clutch Inner Race

NAAT0138S04

I

Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT877A

I Install a new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race.

I

Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively.

I

Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance.

Inspection standard:

Standard value: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)

Allowable limit: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)

I

If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner race.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT878A

ASSEMBLY

NAAT0139

1. Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race.

I

Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes to rear side.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

TF

PD

AX

SAT112B

2. Install oil seal and D-ring onto piston.

I

Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring.

SU

BR

ST

SAT879A

3. Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly.

I

Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT880A

AT-315

Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

4. Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch inner race onto transmission case.

5. Install dish plate, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate.

6. Install snap ring on transmission case.

SAT881A

7. Check operation of low and reverse brake clutch piston. Refer

to “DISASSEMBLY”, AT-313.

SAT872A

8. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.

If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.

Specified clearance:

Standard

0.8 - 1.1 mm (0.031 - 0.043 in)

Allowable limit

2.3 mm (0.091 in)

Retaining plate:

Refer to SDS, AT-349.

SAT885A

9. Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring.

I

Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and held by petroleum jelly.

SAT884A

AT-316

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Forward Clutch Drum Assembly

Forward Clutch Drum Assembly

COMPONENTS

NAAT0140

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT211GA

EC

FE

CL

MT

DISASSEMBLY

1. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.

2. Remove side plate from forward clutch drum.

SAT212G

3. Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum.

4. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.

NAAT0141

TF

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

SAT213G

5. Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT891A

AT-317

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)

INSPECTION

NAAT0142

Forward Clutch Drum

NAAT0142S01

I

Check spline portion for wear or damage.

I

Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle bearing for wear or damage.

SAT892A

Needle Bearing and Low One-way Clutch

I

Check frictional surface for wear or damage.

NAAT0142S02

SAT893A

ASSEMBLY

1. Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum.

2. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.

NAAT0143

SAT214G

3. Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by pushing the roller in evenly.

SAT894A

I

Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.

SAT895A

AT-318

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)

4. Install side plate onto forward clutch drum.

5. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT887A

Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub

COMPONENTS

NAAT0144

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

SAT896AA

SU

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0145

1. Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub forward.

BR

ST

SAT897A

2. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT898A

AT-319

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)

3. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.

SAT899A

4. Remove end bearing.

SAT900A

5. Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit from forward clutch hub.

SAT955A

6. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.

SAT901A

INSPECTION

NAAT0146

Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub

NAAT0146S01

I

Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks.

I

Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust washer for wear or damage.

I

Check spline for wear or damage.

SAT902A

AT-320

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)

Snap Ring and End Bearing

I

Check for deformation or damage.

NAAT0146S02

GI

MA

SAT903A

ASSEMBLY

1. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.

2. Install end bearing.

EM

LC

NAAT0147

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT901A

3. Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub.

I

Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.

4. Install end bearing.

5. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.

TF

PD

AX

SAT904A

SU

6. Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

I

Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear internal gear.

BR

ST

RS

BT

SAT906A

7. Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT907A

AT-321

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)

8. After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates clockwise.

SAT905A

Band Servo Piston Assembly

COMPONENTS

NAAT0148

SAT908AC

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0149

1. Block one oil hole in OD servo piston retainer and the center hole in OD band servo piston.

2. Apply compressed air to the other oil hole in piston retainer to remove OD band servo piston from retainer.

3. Remove D-ring from OD band servo piston.

SAT909A

4. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer by pushing it forward.

SAT910A

AT-322

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)

5. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT911A

6. Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem from band servo piston.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT912A

7. Remove E-ring from band servo piston.

TF

PD

AX

SAT913A

SU

8. Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston.

9. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.

10. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.

BR

ST

RS

SAT914A

BT

INSPECTION

NAAT0150

Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem

NAAT0150S01

I

Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT915A

AT-323

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)

Return Springs

NAAT0150S02

I

Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter.

Inspection standard:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

SAT916AA

ASSEMBLY

1. Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer.

I

Apply ATF to O-rings.

I

Pay attention to position of each O-ring.

NAAT0151

SAT917A

2. Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston.

SAT918A

3. Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer.

SAT919A

4. Install D-rings onto band servo piston.

I

Apply ATF to D-rings.

SAT920A

AT-324

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)

5. Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem onto band servo piston.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT912A

6. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT921A

7. Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward.

TF

PD

AX

SAT922A

8. Install D-ring on OD band servo piston.

I

Apply ATF to D-ring.

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT923A

BT

9. Install OD band servo piston onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT924A

AT-325

Parking Pawl Components

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Parking Pawl Components

COMPONENTS

NAAT0152

SAT558J

DISASSEMBLY

NAAT0153

1. Slide return spring to the front of adapter case flange.

2. Remove return spring, parking pawl spacer and parking pawl from adapter case.

3. Remove parking pawl shaft from adapter case.

SAT226H

4. Remove parking actuator support from adapter case.

SAT228H

AT-326

REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS

Parking Pawl Components (Cont’d)

INSPECTION

Parking Pawl and Parking Actuator Support

I

Check contact surface of parking rod for wear.

NAAT0209

NAAT0209S01

Rear Extension Assembly (2WD model only)

NAAT0209S02

I

Check for free play between companion flange and output shaft.

I

Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear.

I

Check contact surface of output shaft for wear.

SAT998G

ASSEMBLY

NAAT0154

1. Install parking actuator support onto adapter case.

2. Insert parking pawl shaft into adapter case.

3. Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto parking pawl shaft.

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT229H

4. Bend return spring upward and install it onto adapter case.

SAT226H

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

AT-327

Assembly (1)

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (1)

NAAT0155

1. Install manual shaft components.

a. Install oil seal onto manual shaft.

I

Apply ATF to oil seal.

I

Wrap threads of manual shaft with masking tape.

b. Insert manual shaft and oil seal as a unit into transmission case.

c. Remove masking tape.

SAT931A d. Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case.

SAT932A e. Align groove in shaft with retaining pin hole, then retaining pin into position as shown in figure at left.

SAT933A f.

Install detent spring and spacer.

g. While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto manual shaft.

SAT901E h. Install lock nuts onto manual shaft.

SAT936A

AT-328

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (1) (Cont’d)

2. Install accumulator piston.

a. Install O-rings onto accumulator piston.

I

Apply ATF to O-rings.

Accumulator piston O-rings

GI

Accumulator

Small diameter end

Large diameter end

A

29 (1.14)

45 (1.77)

B

32 (1.26)

50 (1.97)

C

45 (1.77)

50 (1.97)

MA

Unit: mm (in)

D

29 (1.14)

45 (1.77)

EM

LC

SAT523GA b. Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case.

Free length of return spring:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT938A c. Install accumulator pistons A, B, C and D.

I

Apply ATF to transmission case.

SAT939AA

3. Install band servo piston.

a. Install return springs onto servo piston.

SU

BR

ST

TF

PD

AX

RS

SAT941A

BT

b. Install band servo piston onto transmission case.

I

Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case.

c. Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT942A

AT-329

Assembly (1) (Cont’d)

ASSEMBLY

d. Install band servo retainer onto transmission case.

SAT940A

4. Install rear side clutch and gear components.

a. Place transmission case in vertical position.

SAT943A b. Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly. Then slowly rotate it clockwise until its hub passes fully over clutch inner race inside transmission case.

SAT944A c. Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch assembly is correct.

SAT945A d. Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.

I

Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in overrun clutch hub.

SAT946A

AT-330

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (1) (Cont’d) e. Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly.

GI

MA

SAT947A f.

Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

FE

CL

MT

SAT948A g. Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding forward clutch hub.

TF

EM

LC

EC

SAT949A h. Place transmission case into horizontal position.

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT527G

BT

i.

Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a unit onto transmission case.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT951A

AT-331

Assembly (1) (Cont’d)

ASSEMBLY

j.

Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT952A k. Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.

I

Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front internal gear.

SAT953A l.

Install front internal gear on transmission case.

SAT954A

5. Install rear extension assembly on transmission case (2WD model only).

a. Install revolution sensor on rear extension.

b. Install rear extension gasket on transmission case.

c. Install parking rod on transmission case.

d. Install parking gear and needle bearing.

I

Insert rear extension assembly into place while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.

SAT546J

6. Install output shaft and parking gear (4WD model only).

a. Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly lifting front internal gear.

I

Do not force output shaft against front of transmission case.

SAT216B

AT-332

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (1) (Cont’d) b. Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case.

Install snap ring on front of output shaft.

I

Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear direction.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT957A c. Install needle bearing on transmission case.

I

Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to rear.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT217B d. Install parking gear on transmission case.

TF

PD

AX

SAT218B

SU

e. Install snap ring on rear of output shaft.

I

Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in forward direction.

BR

ST

SAT960A

7. Install adapter case (4WD model only).

a. Install oil seal on adapter case.

I

Apply ATF to oil seal.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT759I

AT-333

Assembly (1) (Cont’d)

ASSEMBLY

b. Install O-ring on revolution sensor.

I

Apply ATF to O-ring.

c. Install revolution sensor on adapter case.

SAT757I d. Install adapter case gasket on transmission case.

SAT963A e. Install parking rod on transmission case.

SAT964A f.

Install adapter case on transmission case.

SAT755I

8. Install front side clutch and gear components.

a. Install rear sun gear on transmission case.

I

Pay attention to its direction.

SAT974A

AT-334

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (1) (Cont’d) b. Make sure needle bearing is on front of front planetary carrier.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

c. Make sure needle bearing is on rear of front planetary carrier.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to bearing.

I

Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to front.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT967A d. While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front planetary carrier on forward clutch drum.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT969A

I

Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward clutch assembly.

TF

PD

AX

SAT970A

SU

e. Make sure bearing races are on front and rear of clutch pack.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.

I

Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in clutch pack.

BR

ST

SAT971A f.

Install clutch pack into transmission case.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT973A

AT-335

Adjustment

ASSEMBLY

Adjustment

=NAAT0156

When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end play or reverse clutch end play must be adjusted.

Part name

Transmission case

Low one-way clutch inner race

Overrun clutch hub

Rear internal gear

Rear planetary carrier

Rear sun gear

Front planetary carrier

Front sun gear

High clutch hub

High clutch drum

Oil pump cover

Reverse clutch drum

Total end play

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Reverse clutch end play

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

1. Adjust total end play.

Total end play “T

1

”:

0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

SAT975A a. With needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge),

J34291-2 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder should rest on top of the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set screw.

SAT976A b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.

SAT977A

AT-336

ASSEMBLY

Adjustment (Cont’d) c. Install original bearing race inside reverse clutch drum. Place shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging plunger to rest on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT978A d. Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement should give exact total end play.

Total end play “T

1

”:

0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

I

If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary.

Available oil pump cover bearing race:

Refer to SDS, AT-349.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT979A

2. Adjust reverse clutch drum end play.

Reverse clutch drum end play “T

2

”:

0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)

TF

PD

AX

SAT980A

SU

a. Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface of reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw.

BR

ST

RS

BT

SAT981A b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT982AA

AT-337

Adjustment (Cont’d)

ASSEMBLY

c. Install original thrust washer on oil pump. Place shim setting gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Allow gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock plunger in place with set screw.

SAT983A d. Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger and gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact reverse clutch drum end play.

Reverse clutch drum end play “T

2

”:

0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)

I

If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary.

Available oil pump thrust washer:

Refer to SDS, AT-350.

SAT984A

Assembly (2)

1. Install brake band and band strut.

a. Install band strut on brake band.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to band strut.

NAAT0157

SAT985A b. Place brake band on periphery of reverse clutch drum, and insert band strut into end of band servo piston stem.

SAT986A c. Install anchor end bolt on transmission case. Then, tighten anchor end bolt just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch pack) will not tilt forward.

SAT987A

AT-338

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (2) (Cont’d)

2. Install input shaft on transmission case.

I

Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side is front.

3. Install gasket on transmission case.

GI

MA

SAT988A

4. Install oil pump assembly.

a. Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing.

b. Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

FE

CL

MT

SAT989A c. Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit.

TF

EM

LC

EC

SAT990A d. Install O-ring on oil pump assembly.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

SAT991A

BT

e. Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case and oil pump assembly.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT992A

AT-339

Assembly (2) (Cont’d)

ASSEMBLY

f.

Install oil pump assembly.

I

Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes in oil pump assembly as guides.

SAT993A

I

Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in transmission, as shown at left.

SAT994A

5. Install O-ring on input shaft.

I

Apply ATF to O-rings.

SAT114B

6. Install converter housing.

a. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine anaerobic liquid gasket, Three Bond TB1215, Locktite Part No. 51813 or equivalent) to outer periphery of bolt holes in converter housing.

I

Do not apply too much sealant.

SAT397C b. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine anaerobic liquid gasket, Three Bond TB1215, Locktite Part No. 51813 or equivalent) to seating surfaces of bolts that secure front of converter housing.

c. Install converter housing on transmission case.

SAT158G

AT-340

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (2) (Cont’d)

7. Adjust brake band.

a. Tighten anchor end bolt to specified torque.

Anchor end bolt:

: 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)

b. Back off anchor end bolt two and a half turns.

GI

MA

EM

LC

SAT001B c. While holding anchor end bolt, tighten lock nut.

EC

FE

CL

MT

SAT002B

8. Install terminal cord assembly.

a. Install O-ring on terminal cord assembly.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

b. Compress terminal cord assembly stopper and install terminal cord assembly on transmission case.

TF

PD

AX

SAT115B

9. Install control valve assembly.

a. Install accumulator piston return springs B, C and D.

Free length of return springs:

Refer to SDS, AT-346.

SU

BR

ST

SAT004BA b. Install manual valve on control valve.

I

Apply ATF to manual valve.

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT005B

AT-341

Assembly (2) (Cont’d)

ASSEMBLY

c. Place control valve assembly on transmission case. Connect solenoid connector for upper body.

d. Install connector clip.

SAT006B e. Install control valve assembly on transmission case.

f.

Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B.

I

Check that terminal assembly does not catch.

Bolt symbol

A

B

 mm (in)

33 (1.30)

45 (1.77)

SAT353B g. Install O-ring on oil strainer.

I

Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

h. Install oil strainer on control valve.

SAT221B i.

Securely fasten terminal harness with clips.

SAT009B

AT-342

ASSEMBLY

Assembly (2) (Cont’d) j.

Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid temperature sensor connectors.

GI

MA

SAT010B

10. Install oil pan.

a. Attach a magnet to oil pan.

FE

CL

MT

SAT011B b. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case.

c. Install oil pan and bracket on transmission case.

I

Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.

I

Before installing bolts, remove traces of sealant and oil from mating surface and thread holes.

I

Tighten four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket.

d. Tighten drain plug.

TF

PD

AX

SAT365I

11. Install PNP switch.

a. Check that manual shaft is in “1” position.

b. Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft.

c. Move manual shaft to “N”.

SU

BR

ST

EM

LC

EC

RS

SAT299I

BT

d. Tighten bolts while inserting 4.0 mm (0.157 in) dia. pin vertically into locating holes in PNP switch and manual shaft.

HA

SC

EL

IDX

SAT014B

AT-343

Assembly (2) (Cont’d)

ASSEMBLY

12. Install torque converter.

a. Pour ATF into torque converter.

I

Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid are required for a new torque converter.

I

When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained.

SAT428DA b. Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump.

SAT016B c. Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper position.

Distance “A”:

26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more

SAT017B

AT-344

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

General Specifications

Applied model

Automatic transmission model

Transmission model code number

Stall torque ratio

Transmission gear ratio

Recommended fluid

1st

2nd

Top

OD

Reverse

General Specifications

NAAT0160

VG33E engine

2WD 4WD

RE4R01A

4EX08 43X73

2.0 : 1

2.785

1.545

1.000

0.694

2.272

Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1

8.1 (8-5/8 US qt, 7-1/8 Imp qt) 8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/2 Imp qt) Fluid capacity

*1: Refer to MA-13, “Fluids and Lubricants”.

Shift Schedule

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION

NAAT0178

NAAT0178S01

Throttle position

Full throttle

Half throttle

D

1

,

D

2

48 - 52

(30 - 32)

35 - 39

(22 - 24)

D

2

,

D

3

93 - 101

(58 - 63)

69 - 75

(43 - 47)

D

3

,

D

4

148 - 158

(92 - 98)

134 - 142

(83 - 88)

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

D

4

,

D

3

143 - 153

(89 - 95)

59 - 67

(37 - 42)

D

3

,

D

2

88 - 96

(55 - 60)

32 - 38

(20 - 24)

D

2

,

D

1

43 - 47

(27 - 29)

10 - 14

(6 - 9)

1

2

,

1

1

44 - 48

(27 - 30)

44 - 48

(27 - 30)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

PD

AX

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP

4WD (Final gear ratio: 4.363) and 4WD (Final gear ratio: 4.636)

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)

Throttle position

Overdrive control switch [Shift position]

Lock-up “ON”

149 - 157 (93 - 98)

Lock-up “OFF”

144 - 152 (89 - 94)

Full throttle

Half throttle

ON [D

4

]

OFF [D

3

]

ON [D

4

]

OFF [D

3

]

74 - 82 (46 - 51)

141 - 149 (88 - 93)

74 - 82 (46 - 51)

71 - 79 (44 - 49)

85 - 93 (53 - 58)

71 - 79 (44 - 49)

NAAT0178S02

SU

BR

ST

RS

Stall Revolution

NAAT0163

Stall revolution rpm 2,440 - 2,640

BT

Engine speed rpm

Idle

Stall

Line Pressure

Line pressure kPa (kg/cm 2 , psi)

D, 2 and 1 positions

422 - 461 (4.3 - 4.7, 61 - 67)

1,020 - 1,098 (10.4 - 11.2, 148 - 159)

R position

667 - 706 (6.8 - 7.2, 97 - 102)

1,422 - 1,500 (14.5 - 15.3, 206 - 218)

NAAT0164

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-345

Return Springs

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Return Springs

Parts

Control valve

Reverse clutch

Upper body

Lower body

Torque converter relief valve spring

Pressure regulator valve spring

Pressure modifier valve spring

Accumulator control valve spring

Shuttle shift valve D spring

4-2 sequence valve spring

Shift valve B spring

4-2 relay valve spring

Shift valve A spring

Overrun clutch control valve spring

Overrun clutch reducing valve spring

Shuttle shift valve S spring

Pilot valve spring

Torque converter clutch control valve spring

Modifier accumulator valve spring

1st reducing valve spring

3-2 timing valve spring

Servo charger valve spring

16 pcs

High clutch

Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)

Low & reverse brake

10 pcs

20 pcs

18 pcs

Band servo

Accumulator

Spring A

Spring B

Spring C

Accumulator A

Accumulator B

Accumulator C

Accumulator D

Part No.*

31742-41X23

31742-41X24

31742-41X19

31762-41X01

31756-41X00

31762-41X01

31756-41X00

31762-41X01

31762-41X03

31742-41X20

31762-41X04

31742-41X13

31742-41X22

31742-27X70

31756-41X05

31742-41X06

31742-41X06

31521-41X02

(Assembly)

31521-41X03

(Assembly)

31521-41X00

(Assembly)

31655-41X00

(Assembly)

31605-41X05

31605-41X00

31605-41X01

31605-41X02

31605-41X10

31605-41X09

31605-41X06

Item

Free length

38.0 (1.496)

44.02 (1.7331)

31.95 (1.2579)

25.0 (0.984)

29.1 (1.146)

25.0 (0.984)

29.1 (1.146)

25.0 (0.984)

23.6 (0.929)

32.5 (1.280)

51.0 (2.008)

25.7 (1.012)

18.5 (0.728)

31.4 (1.236)

25.4 (1.000)

23.0 (0.906)

23.0 (0.906)

19.7 (0.7756)

24.2 (0.9528)

35.77 (1.4083)

22.3 (0.878)

45.6 (1.795)

53.8 (2.118)

29.7 (1.169)

43.0 (1.693)

66.0 (2.598)

45.0 (1.772)

58.4 (2.299)

NAAT0165

Unit: mm (in)

Outer diameter

9.0 (0.354)

14.0 (0.551)

6.8 (0.268)

7.0 (0.276)

6.95 (0.2736)

7.0 (0.276)

6.95 (0.2736)

7.0 (0.276)

7.0 (0.276)

7.0 (0.276)

5.65 (0.2224)

9.0 (0.354)

13.0 (0.512)

9.8 (0.386)

6.75 (0.2657)

6.7 (0.264)

6.7 (0.264)

11.6 (0.457)

11.6 (0.457)

9.7 (0.382)

11.2 (0.441)

34.3 (1.350)

40.3 (1.587)

27.6 (1.087)

18.0 (0.709)

20.0 (0.787)

29.3 (1.154)

17.3 (0.681)

AT-346

Accumulator

Small diameter end

Large diameter end

REVERSE CLUTCH

Code number

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate mm (in)

Clearance mm (in)

Thickness of retaining plate

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Standard

Wear limit

Standard

Allowable limit

Accumulator O-ring

A

29 (1.14)

45 (1.77)

Diameter mm (in)

B

32 (1.26)

50 (1.97)

C

45 (1.77)

50 (1.97)

Accumulator O-ring

NAAT0166

GI

D

29 (1.14)

45 (1.77)

MA

EM

Clutches and Brakes

4EX08 43X73

2

2

1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)

Thickness mm (in)

4.8 (0.189)

5.0 (0.197)

5.2 (0.205)

5.4 (0.213)

5.6 (0.220)

1.80 (0.0709)

0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)

1.2 (0.047)

Part number*

31537-42X02

31537-42X03

31537-42X04

31537-42X05

31537-42X06

NAAT0167

NAAT0167S01

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

TF

HIGH CLUTCH

Code number

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate mm (in)

Clearance mm (in)

Thickness of retaining plate

Standard

Wear limit

Standard

Allowable limit

4EX08 43X73

5

5

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

1.40 (0.0551)

1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087)

2.8 (0.110)

Thickness mm (in) Part number*

3.4 (0.134)

3.6 (0.142)

3.8 (0.150)

4.0 (0.157)

4.2 (0.165)

4.4 (0.173)

4.6 (0.181)

4.8 (0.189)

31537-41X71

31537-41X61

31537-41X62

31537-41X63

31537-41X64

31537-41X65

31537-41X66

31537-41X67

NAAT0167S02

PD

AX

SU

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-347

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)

FORWARD CLUTCH

Code number

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate mm (in)

Clearance mm (in)

Standard

Wear limit

Standard

Allowable limit

Thickness of retaining plate

NAAT0167S03

Thickness mm (in)

8.0 (0.315)

8.1 (0.319)

8.2 (0.323)

8.3 (0.327)

8.4 (0.331)

8.5 (0.335)

8.6 (0.339)

8.7 (0.343)

8.8 (0.346)

8.9 (0.350)

9.0 (0.354)

9.1 (0.358)

9.2 (0.362)

4EX08

6

6

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

1.40 (0.0551)

0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295)

1.85 (0.0728)

Part number* Thickness mm (in)

31537-41X00

31537-42X60

31537-41X01

31537-42X61

31537-41X02

31537-42X62

31537-41X03

31537-42X63

31537-41X04

31537-42X64

31537-41X05

31537-42X65

31537-41X06

4.6 (0.181)

4.8 (0.189)

5.0 (0.197)

5.2 (0.205)

5.4 (0.213)

5.6 (0.220)

43X73

7

7

Part number*

31537-42X13

31537-42X14

31537-42X15

31537-4AX00

31537-4AX01

31537-4AX02

OVERRUN CLUTCH

Code number

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

NAAT0167S04

Thickness of drive plate mm (in)

Clearance mm (in)

Thickness of retaining plate

Standard

Wear limit

Standard

Allowable limit

4EX08 43X73

3

5

1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)

Thickness mm (in)

4.2 (0.165)

4.4 (0.173)

4.6 (0.181)

4.8 (0.189)

5.0 (0.197)

1.80 (0.0709)

1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)

2.0 (0.079)

Part number*

31537-41X80

31537-41X81

31537-41X82

31537-41X83

31537-41X84

AT-348

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)

LOW & REVERSE BRAKE

NAAT0167S05

Code number

Number of drive plates

Number of driven plates

Thickness of drive plate mm (in)

Clearance mm (in)

Thickness of retaining plate

Standard

Wear limit

Standard

Allowable limit

4EX08 43X73

7

7

1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)

Thickness mm (in)

6.6 (0.260)

6.8 (0.268)

7.0 (0.276)

7.2 (0.283)

7.4 (0.291)

7.6 (0.299)

7.8 (0.307)

8.0 (0.315)

8.2 (0.323)

8.4 (0.331)

8.6 (0.339)

8.8 (0.346)

9.0 (0.354)

1.40 (0.0551)

0.8 - 1.1 (0.031 - 0.043)

2.3 (0.091)

Part number*

31667-41X17

31667-41X11

31667-41X12

31667-41X13

31667-41X14

31667-41X07

31667-41X08

31667-41X00

31667-41X01

31667-41X02

31667-41X03

31667-41X04

31667-41X05

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

BRAKE BAND

Anchor end bolt nut tightening torque

Anchor end bolt tightening torque

Number of returning revolution for anchor end bolt

NAAT0167S06

TF

40 - 51 N·m (4.1 - 5.2 kg-m, 30 - 38 ft-lb)

4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)

2.5

PD

Oil pump clearance

Seal ring clearance

Total end play “T

1

Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch

Cam ring — oil pump housing Standard

NAAT0168

Unit: mm (in)

0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009)

Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil pump housing

Standard 0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017)

Standard

Allowable limit

0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)

0.25 (0.0098)

AX

SU

BR

ST

Total End Play

NAAT0169

RS

Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race

0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number*

0.8 (0.031)

1.0 (0.039)

1.2 (0.047)

1.4 (0.055)

1.6 (0.063)

1.8 (0.071)

2.0 (0.079)

31435-41X01

31435-41X02

31435-41X03

31435-41X04

31435-41X05

31435-41X06

31435-41X07

BT

HA

SC

EL

IDX

AT-349

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

Reverse Clutch Drum End Play

Reverse Clutch Drum End Play

Reverse clutch drum end play “T

2

Thickness of oil pump thrust washer

0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)

Thickness mm (in)

0.9 (0.035)

1.1 (0.043)

1.3 (0.051)

1.5 (0.059)

1.7 (0.067)

1.9 (0.075)

Part number*

31528-21X01

31528-21X02

31528-21X03

31528-21X04

31528-21X05

31528-21X06

NAAT0170

Manual control linkage

Removal and Installation

Number of returning revolutions for lock nut

Lock nut tightening torque

2

4.4 - 5.9 N·m

(0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)

26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more

NAAT0171

Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter

*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.

Shift Solenoid Valves

NAAT0217

Gear position

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

1

ON (Closed)

ON (Closed)

2

OFF (Open)

ON (Closed)

3

OFF (Open)

OFF (Open)

4

ON (Closed)

OFF (Open)

Solenoid valves

Shift solenoid valve A

Shift solenoid valve B

Overrun clutch solenoid valve

Line pressure solenoid valve

Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

Solenoid Valves

Resistance (Approx.) Ω

20 - 40

20 - 40

20 - 40

2.5 - 5

10 - 20

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor

Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item Condition Specification

A/T fluid temperature sensor

Cold [20°C (68°F)]

"

Hot [80°C (176°F)]

Approximately 1.5V

"

Approximately 0.5V

Revolution Sensor

Terminal No.

3

6

7

2

4

1

2

1

Terminal No.

2

3

3

Resistance

500 - 650 Ω

No continuity

No continuity

Dropping Resistor

Resistance 11.2 - 12.8

NAAT0218

NAAT0219

NAAT0220

NAAT0221

AT-350

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents